., u Je*-.           n«u««i         Publication 9240. 1-25
United States
Environmental Protection      Solid Waste and
Agency            Emergency Response    December 1994
Supertund _ ___

 SUPERFUND ANALYTICAL
 METHODS FOR LOW
 CONCENTRATION WATER FOR
 INORGANICS ANALYSIS
      REPRODUCED BY
      U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
         NATIONAL TECHNICAL
         INFORMATION SERVICE
         SPRINGFIELD, VA 22161

-------
                                              9240.1-25
                                              PB95-963517
                                              EPA540/R-94/092
         SUPERFUND ANALTTICAL METHODS


                    FOR


LOW CONCENTRATION WATER FOR INORGANICS ANALYSIS


                    10/91

-------
                                   EXHIBIT B

                    REPORTING AND DELIVERABLES REQUIREMENTS

                                                                       Page

SECTION I:   CONTRACT REPORTS/DELIVERABLES  DISTRIBUTION   	  B-l

SECTION II:  REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND ORDER  OF DATA
             DELIVERABLES   	  B-4

SECTION III: FORM INSTRUCTION GUIDE   	   B-14

SECTION IV:  DATA REPORTING FORMS   	   B-45
                                                                       10/91

-------
                 SECTION I - CONTRACT REPORTS/DELIVERABLES DISTRIBUTION
   '                         <•«                                       '
The following table reiterates Che Contract reporting and deliverables requirements
specified in the Contract Schedule and specifies Che distribution that is required
for each deliverable.  NOTE: Specific recipient names and addresses are subject  to
change during the term of the contract.  The Sample Management Office (SMO) will
notify the Contractor in writing of such changes when they occur.
1
Item
*****A. Standard
Operating
Procedures
B. Sample Traffic
Reports
**C. Sample Data
Package
D. Data in Computer
Readable Format

****£. Complete SDG
File
*F. Quarterly/Annual
Verification
of Instrument
Parameters
*G. ICP/MS
Diskettes/Tapes



*****H. Quality
Assurance
Plan
| No.
| Copies
3
1
2
1

1
2
Lot



3
Delivery
Schedule
60 days after
contract award,
and as required
in Exhibit E
3 days after
receipt of last
sample in Sample
Delivery Group
(SDG)***
14 days after
receipt of last
sample in SDG
14 days after
receipt of last
sample in SDG
14 days after
receipt of last
sample in SDG**
Quarterly:
15th day of
January , April
July , October
Retain for 365
days after
submission; or
submit them
within 7 days
of written
request by SMO
or EMSL/LV
60 days after
contract award,
and as required
in Exhibit E
| Dis
(1)

X
X
X


X
A.



A.
tributi
(2)
X




X

> direc



> direc
on
(3)
X

X



X
ted



:ed
1 1
(4)
X











                                        B-l
10/91

-------
 Distribution:
 (1)  Sample  Management  Office  (SMO)
 (2)  Region-Client
 (3)  Environmental  Monitoring  Systems Laboratory (EMSL)
 (4)  National  Enforcement  Investigations Center (NEIC)

      *      Also required  in each Sample Data Package.

      **     Concurrent deliveiry of these items to all recipients is required.

      ***   Sample Delivery Groi,' '~OG) is a group of samples within a Case,
            received over a period of 7 days or less and not exceeding 20
            samples.  Data for all samples in the SDG are due concurrently..

      ****  Complete SDG File  will contain the sample data package plus all
            of  the original documents described in Exhibit B under "Complete
            SDG File."  The Complete SDG File must be delivered concurrently
            with the Sample Data Package.

     *****See  Exhibit E for a more  detailed description.

    NOTE:   As  specified in the Contract Schedule,  unless  otherwise
    instructed by SMO,  the Contractor shall dispose of unused sample volume
    and used sample bottles/containers  no earlier  than sixty (60)  days
    following  submission of analytical  data.  Sample disposal and  disposal
    of unused  sample bottles/containers is the responsibility of the
    Contractor and  should  be done in accordance with all  applicable  laws and
    regulations governing  the  disposal  of such material.

Distribution Addresses:

(1)  USEPA Contract  Laboratory  Program  (CLP)
    Sample Management Office (SMO)
    P. 0. Box  818
    Alexandria, VA   22313
    For overnight delivery service,  use street address:
    300 N.  Lee Street,  2nd Floor
    Alexandria, VA   22314

(2)  USEPA REGIONS:   The CLP Sample  Management Office will provide  the
    Contractor with the list  of addressees  for the ten EPA Regions.   SMO
    will  provide  the Contractor with updated Regional  address/name lists as
    necessary  throughout the  period of the  contract and identify other
    client  recipients on a case-by-case basis.
                                    B-2                                10/91

-------
(3)  USEFA Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (EHSL)
     944 E.  Harmon Avenue
     Las Vegas,  NV  89109

(4)  USEPA National Enforcement Investigations Center (NEIC)
     Attn:  CLP Audit Program
     Denver  Federal Center Bldg.  53
     P.O.  Box 25227
     Denver, CO  80225
                                  B-3
                                                                      10/91

-------
                                  SECTION II

              REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND ORDER OF DATA DELIVERABLES

      The Contractor shall provide reports and other deliverables as
specified in the Contract Performance/Delivery Schedule.  The required
content and form of each deliverable is described in this Exhibit.

     All reports and documentation shall be:

     o  Legible,
     o  Clearly  labeled and  completed  in accordance with instructions in this
        Exhibit,
     o  Arranged in the order  specified in  this Section,

     o  Paginated in ascending order,  and

     o  Single-sided.

      If submitted documentation does not conform to the above criteria, the
Contractor shall be required to resubmit such documentation with
deficiency(ies)  corrected, at no additional cost.

      Whenever the Contractor is required to submit or resubmit data as  a
result of an on-site laboratory evaluation, a CCS assessment, or through a
SMO action or a Regional data reviewer's request,  the data shall be clearly
marked as Additional Data and shall be sent to all three contractual data
recipients (SMO, EMSL/LV, and the Client Region).   A cover letter shall  be
included which describes which data are being delivered, to which Case(s) the
data pertain, and who requested the data.

      Whenever the  Contractor  is required or requested to respond to Contract
Compliance Screening (CCS) review by SMO, the laboratory response shall be
sent to all three contractual  data recipients (SMO, EMSL/LV, and Region).  In
all three instances the response shall be accompanied by a color-coded Cover
Sheet (Laboratory Response To  Results  of Contract Compliance Screening)  which
shall be provided  in generic format by SMO.

      Section IV of this  Exhibit contains the required  Inorganic  Analysis
Data Reporting Forms in specified formats;  Section III  of  this  Exhibit
contains instructions to  the Contractor for completing  all data reporting
forms to provide SMO with all  required data.  Data elements and field
descriptions for reporting data  in computer - readable  format are contained in
Exhibit H.

      Descriptions  of the requirements for each deliverable item  cited  in the
Contract Performance/Delivery Schedule (see Contract Schedule,  Section  F) are
specified  in parts A-F of this Section.   Items  submitted concurrently shall
be arranged in  the order listed.  Additionally, the components of each
deliverable item shall be arranged in the order presented herein when the
 item is submitted.
                                    B-4                                 10/91

-------
A.   Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) and Quality Assurance Plan (OAT)

     Submit updated SOPs and QAP according to the instructions in Exhibit E.

B.   Sample Traffic Reports
     The original Sample Traffic Report page marked "Lab Copy for Return to
     SMO" with laboratory receipt information and original Contractor
     signature, shall be submitted for each sample in the Sample Delivery
     Group (SDG) .

     Traffic Reports (TRs)  shall be submitted in SDG sets (i.e.,  TRs for all
     samples in an SDG shall be clipped together) ,  with an SDG Cover Sheet
     attached.

     The SDG Cover Sheet shall contain the following items:

     o   Laboratory name
     o   Contract number
     o   Sample Analysis Price - full sample price from contract.

     o  Case Number
     o  List of EPA sample numbers of all samples in the SDG, identifying the
         first and last samples received, and their dates of receipt at the
         laboratory .
     Note:   When more than  one sample is received in the first or last SDG
     shipment,  the "first"  sample  received is  the lowest sample number
     (considering both alpha and numeric designations);  the "last* sample
     received is the  highest sample number (considering  both  alpha and
     numeric designations) .

     Each Traffic Report shall be  clearly marked with the SDG number,  which
     is  the sample number of the first  sample  in the  SDG (as  described in the
     following  paragraph) .   This information shall  be entered below  the Lab
     Receipt Date on  the TR.   In addition,  the TR for the last sample
     received in the  SDG shall be  clearly marked "SDG -  FINAL SAMPLE."

     The EPA sample number  of the  first sample recp'-'^d in the SDG is the SDG
     number.  EPA field sample numbers  are six digits in length.   If the
     Contractor receives a  sample  number of any other length,  contact SMO
     immediately.  When several  samples are received together in the first
     SDG shipment,  the SDG  number  shall be the lowest sample  number
     (considering both alpha and numeric designations) in the first  group of
     samples received under the SDG.   (The SDG number is also reported on all
     data reporting forms.   See Section III, Form Instruction Guide.)

     If  samples are received at the laboratory with multi-sample Traffic
     Reports (TRs) ,  all the samples on one multi-sample TR may not
     necessarily be in the  same SDG.   In this  instance,  the laboratory shall
     make the appropriate number of photocopies of the TR, and submit one
     copy with each SDG^cevfer sheet.. 4  . .
                                    B-5                                 10/91

-------
C.    ??BTPVs Data

     The sample data package shall  include  data  for analysis  of all samples
     in one Sample Delivery Group (SDG),  including but not  limited to
     analytical samples,  field samples,  reanalyses, blanks, spikes,
     duplicates,  laboratory control samples, and FE samples.

     The sample data package shall  be  complete before submission,  shall be
     consecutively paginated and  shall include the following:
                      *
     1.    Cover Page  for  the  LC-Inorganic Analyses Data Package, (COVER PAGE —
          LC-Inorganic Analyses Data Package), including:  laboratory name;
          laboratory  code; contract number; Case No.; Sample Delivery Group
          (SDG) No.;  SAS Number (if appropriate); EPA sample numbers  in
          alphanumeric order, shoving  EPA sample numbers cross-referenced with
          laboratory  ID numbers; comments, describing in detail any problems
          encountered in processing the samples  in the data package;  and,
          completion  of the statement  on use of  ICP background and
          interelement corrections for the samples.

          The Cover Page shall contain the following statement, vffrPflCiP'-  "I
          certify  that this data package is in compliance with the  terms  and
          conditions  of the contract, both technically and for completeness,
          for other than the  conditions detailed above.   Release of the  data
          contained in this hardcopy data package and in the computer-readable
          data  submitted on diskette has been authorized by the Laboratory
          Manager  or  the Manager's designee, as verified by the following
          signature.* This statement shall be followed by the signature  of the
          Laboratory  Manager  or the Manager's designee with a typed line below
          it containing the signer's name and title, and the date of
          signature.

          In addition, on a separate piece of paper, the Contractor shall
          include  any problems encountered, both technical and administrative,
          the corrective action taken  and resolution.

          The Contractor shall retain  a copy of  the Sample Data  Package for
          365 days after final acceptance of data.  After this  time,  the
          Contractor  may dispose  of  the package.

     2.    Sample Data

          Sample data shall  be submitted with the Low Concentration Inorganic
          Analysis Data Reporting Forms  for all  samples  in  the  SDG, including
          the PES,  arranged in increasing alphanumeric EPA  Sample  Number
          order,  followed by the  QC analyses data, and Verification of
          Instrument Parameters forms, raw  data, and copies of the preparation
          logs.

          a.    Results -- Low Concentration Inorganics Analysis Data Sheet
               [FORM  I -  LCIN]

               Tabulated  analytical results  (identification and quantitation)
               of  the* specified analytes  (Exhibit C).  The  validation and

                                    B-6                                  10/91

-------
     release of these results is authorized by a specific, signed
     statement on the Cover Page.  If the Laboratory Manager cannot
     verify all data reported for each sample, he/she shall provide
     a detailed description of the problems associated with the
     sample(s) on the Cover Page.

     The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
     micrograms per liter (ug/L) for all samples.  No other units
     are acceptable. Analytical results shall be reported to two
     significant figures if the result value is less than 10; to
     three significant figures if the value is greater than or equal
     to 10.

b.   tjXut-lity Control Data

     1)   Initial and Continuing  Calibration Verification   [FORM  II-
         LCIN)

     2)   CRDL Standards  [FORM III-LCIN]

     3)   Linear Range Standards  [FORM IV-LCIN]

     4)  Blanks [FORM V-LCIN]

     5)  ICP and ICP/MS Interference Check Sample [FORM VI-LCIN]

     6)  Spike Sample Recovery [FORM VII-LCIN]

     7)  Duplicates [FORM VIII-LCIN]

     8)   Laboratory Control Sample [FORM IX-LCIN]

     9)   Serial Dilution [FORM X-LCIN]

     10)  Standard Addition Results [FORM XI-LCIN]

     11)  Instrument Detection Limits [FORM XII-LCIN]

     12)  Interelement Correction Factors [FORM XIII-LCIN]

     13)  ICP/MS Tuning and Response Faccor Criteria [FORM XIV-LCIN]

     14)  ICP/MS Internal Standards Summary [Form XV-LCIN]

     15)  Analysis Run Log (A) [FORM XVI-LCIN]

     16)  Analysis Run Log (B) [FORM XVII-LCIN]

     17)  Standard Solutions Sources [FORM XVIII-LCIN]

     18)  Sample Log-In Sheet  [FORM DC-1]

     19)  Document Inventory Sheet  [FORM DC-2]
                          B-7                                 10/91

-------
c.   Raw Data

     For each reported value,  the Contractor shall include  in  the
     data package all raw data from the instrument used  to  obtain
     that value and  the QA/QC  values reported  (except for raw  data
     for quarterly and annual  verifications of instrument
     parameters).  Raw data shall contain all  instrument readouts
     used for the sample results, including those readouts  that may
     fall below the  IDL.  All  instruments shall provide a legible
     hard copy of the direct,  real-time instrument readout  (i.e.,
     stripcharts, printer tapes, etc.).  A photocopy or other
     accurate facsimile of the direct sequential instrument readout
     shall be included.

    The order of raw data in the data package shall be:   ICF,
     ICF/MS, HYICP,  Flame AA, Furnace  AA, Mercury,  Cyanide,
    Fluoride, and N02/N03-N.  All raw data shall include
    intensities or concentration for  ICP,  ICP/MS,  HYICP, absorbance
    or concentration for AA,  spec tropho tome trie  measurements,  and
    millivolts for  potentiometric measurements.

    Raw data shall  be  labeled with EPA Sample  Number and
    appropriate codes,  specified in Table  1 Exhibit  B,  to
    unequivocally identify:

     1)   Calibration standards,  including  source and
         preparation date.

    2)   Initial and continuing calibration blanks and preparation
         blanks.

     3)   Initial and continuing calibration verification standards,
         interference check  samples, CRDL standards, linear range
         standards,  tuning standards, memory test standards and
         serial dilution samples.

    4)   Diluted and undiluted samples (by  EPA Sample Number)  and
         all dilutions and volumes used to  obtain the reported
         values.  (If the volumes and dilutions are  consistent for
         all samples in  a given SDG, a general statement outlining
         these  parameters may  be reported  in the SDG Narrative).

    5)   Duplicates.

    6)   Spikes  (indicating  standard  solutions used, final  spike
         concentrations,  volumes involved).   If  spike  information
         (source, concentration, volume) is consistent  for  a given
         SDG,  a general  statement outlining these  parameters may be
         reported in the SDG Narrative).

     7)   Instrument used, any instrument adjustments,  data
         corrections or  other apparent anomalies in the measurement
                         B-8                                10/91

-------
                     record,  including all  data voided or data not used  to
                     obtain reported values and a brief written  explanation in
                     the SOG  Narrative.

                8)    All information, for HYICP,  Flame AA, and .Furnace AA
                     analysis, clearly and  sequentially identified in the raw
                     data, including EPA Sample Number and date  of analysis,
                     sample and analytical  spike  data,  percent recovery,
                     coefficient of variation, full MSA data, MSA correlation
                     coefficient, slope and y intercept of linear fit,  f JiaJ
                     sample concentration (standard addition concentratio. •,

                9)   All ICP/MS tuning and mass calibration data, in addition
                     to all internal standard results including  the  elements
                    and concentration used.

               10)  All retention time  data for  Ion Chromatography.

               11)  Time and  date of each  and every analysis.  Instrument run
                    logs may  be  submitted  if they contain this information.
                    If the instrument does  not automatically provide times  of
                    analysis, they shall be entered manually on  all raw  data
                    for initial  and continuing calibration verification  and
                    blanks, as well as  on  data for tuning solutions, CRDL
                    standards, interference check samples and the linear range
                    standard.

               12)   Integration  tines for all  analyses.

          d.    Preparation Logs

               Preparation Logs  shall be submitted in the following order:
               ICP,  ICP/MS. HYICP,  Flame AA,  Furnace AA,  Mercury. Cyanide,
               Fluoride,  and  N02/N03-N.  These logs shall include:  (1)
               preparation date,  (2)  sample volume,  (3) sufficient information
               to unequivocally  identify which QC samples (i.e. ,  laboratory
               control sample, preparation blank) correspond to  each batch
               prepared,  (4)  comments describing  any significant sample
               changes or reactions that occurred during preparation, and (5)
               report pH <2 or >12,  as  applicable.

     3.   A copy of the Sample Traffic  Report and Cover Sheet submitted in
          Item C for all of the  samples in the SDG.  The Traffic Reports shall
          be  arranged in increasing EPA Sample Number order, considering both
          alpha and numeric designations.

D.   Data in Computer-Readable Form

     The Contractor  shall provide a computer-readable  copy of the data  on
     data reporting  Forms I-XVIII for all  samples in  the Sample Delivery
     Group, as specified in  the Contract Performance/Delivery Schedule.
     Computer-readable data  deliverables shall be submitted on an IBM or IBM-
     compatible, 5.25 inch floppy double-sided,   double density  360 K-byte  or
     a high density  1.2 M-byte diskette or on an IBM  or  IBM-compatible,  3.5

                                    B-9                                  10/91

-------
 inch double-sided, double density  720 K-byte or a high density 1.44 M-
 byte diskette.  The data shall be  recorded in ASCII, text file format,
 and  shall  adhere to the file, record and field specifications  listed in
 Exhibit H.

 When subnitted, diskettes shall be packaged and shipped in such a manner
 that the diskette(s) cannot be bent or folded, and will not be exposed
 to extreme heat or cold or any type of electromagnetic radiation.   The
 diskette(s) must be included in the same shipment as the hardeopy data
 and  shall, at a minimum, be enclosed in a diskette mailer.

 Complete SPG File (CSF)

 As specified in the Delivery Schedule,  one Complete SDG File,  including
 the  original Sample Data Package,  shall be delivered to the Region
 concurrently with delivery of copies of the Sample Data Package to SMO
 and  EMSL/LV.  The contents of the CSF will be numbered according to the
 specifications described in Section III and IV of Exhibit B.   The
 Document Inventory Sheet,  Form DC-2, is contained in Section IV.   The
 CSF will contain all original documents where possible.   No copies  of
 original documents will be placed in the CSF unless the  originals  are
bound in a logbook maintained by the laboratory.   The CSF will contain
all original documents specified in Section III and IV,  and Form DC-2 of
Exhibit B.

The CSF will consist of the following original documents in addition to
 the documents in the Sample Data Package:

 1.   Original Sample Data  Package  (See  Exhibit  B,  Item C)

 2.   A completed and signed Document Inventory  Sheet (Form DC-2)

 3.   All original shipping documents including,  but not  limited to, the
     following documents:

     a.   EPA Chain-of-Custody Record.

     b.   Airbills.

     c.   EPA (SMO)  Traffic  Reports.

     d.   Sample  Tags  (if  present)  sealed  in  plastic bags.

4.   All original receiving documents including,  but not limited to, the
     following documents:

     a.   Form DC-1.

     b.   Other receiving  forms or copies  of receiving logbooks.

     c.   SDG Cover Sheet.

 5.   All original laboratory records of sample transfer, preparation, and
     analysis including, but not limited to, the following documents:

                              B-10                                10/91

-------
          a.   Original preparation and analysis forms or copies of
               preparation and analysis logbook pages.

          b.   Internal sample and sample extract transfer chain-of-custody
               records.

          c.   All instrument  output,  including strip charts from screening
               activities.

     6.   All other original case-specific documents in the possession of the
          laboratory including,  but not limited to,  the following documents:

          a.   Telephone contact logs.

          b.   Copies  of personal  logbook pages.

          c.   All handwritten Case-specific notes.

          d.   Any other Case-specific  documents  not  covered by  the above.

          NOTE: All Case-related  documentation may be used or admitted  as
          evidence  in  subsequent legal  proceedings.   Any other Case-specific
          documents  generated  after  the CSF is  sent,  as well as  copies that
          are altered  in any fashion, are also  deliverables (original to the
          Region and copies  to SMO and  EMSL/LV).

          If the laboratory  does submit Case-specific documents  after
          submission of the  CSF, the documents  should be numbered as an
          addendum to  the CSF  and  a  revised DC-2  Form should be  submitted;  or
          the documents should be  numbered as a new CSF and a new DC-2 Form
          should be  submitted  to the Region only.

F.   Quarterly/Annual  Verification of  Instri't||«»'"f Parj>ineters

     The Contractor shall perform  and  report  quarterly/annual verification of
     instrument detection limits by methods specified in Exhibit E for  each
     instrument used under this contract.  For  the ICP and ICP/MS
     instrumentation,  the Contractor shall also perform and report annually
     interelement  correction factors (including method of determination),
     wavelengths and masses used and integration times.  Forms  for
     Quarterly/Annual  Verification of  Instrument Parameters for the current
     year shall be submitted in each SDG data package, on Forms XII and XIII
     as specified  in Section III of this Exhibit.  Submission of
     Quarterly/Annual  Verification of  Instrument Parameters shall include the
     raw data used to  determine those  values  reported.



     Analytical results and QC for the method reference sample analysis, as
     specified in  Exhibit E, shall be  tabulated on Form IX.
                                   B-ll                                io/91

-------
H.   Results of Performance Evaluation Safflple (PES)

     Analytical results for the PES analysis,  as specified in Exhibit E,
     shall be tabulated on Form I.
                                  B-12                                 10/91

-------
                                    Table 1

                            Codes for Labeline DaCa
       Sanple                                                   XXXXXX
       Duplicate                                               JUUULXAU
       Matrix Spike                                            XXXXXXS
       Serial Dilution                                         JUUUtxXju
       Analytical  Spike                                        JOUtxXXA
       Post Digestion/Distillation Spike                       XXXXXXA
       MSA:                                                     	
         Zero Addition                                         XXXxXXO
         First Addition                                        XXXXXX1
         Second Addition                                       XXXXXX2
         Third Addition                                        XXXXXX3
       Instrument  Calibration Standards:
         1C?                                 S or SO for blank standard
         Atonic Absorption and  Cyanide                 SO, S10,...etc.
       Initial Calibration Verification                             ICV
       Initial Calibration Blank                                    ICB
       Continuing  Calibration Verification                          CCV
       Continuing  Calibration Blank                                 CCB
       Interference Check Samples:
         Solution  A                                               ICSA
         Solution  AB                                             ICSAB
      CRDL Standard                                                CRI
      Laboratory  Control Samples                                   LCS
      Preparation Blank   •                                        PBV
      Linear Range Analysis Standard                               LRS
      Memory Test Solution                                         UTS
      Tuning Solution                                               TS
     Notes:

1.   When an analytical spike or MSA is performed on samples other than field
     samples,  the "A", "0", "1", "2" or "3" suffixes must be the last to be
     added to the EPA Sample Number.  For instance, an analytical spike of a
     duplicate must be formatted "XXXXXXDA".

2.   The numeric suffix that follows the "S" suffix for the standards
     indicates the true value of the concentration of the standard in ug/L.

3.   ICF calibration standards usually consist of several analytes at
     different concentrations.  Therefore, no numeric suffix can follow the
     ICP calibration standards unless all the analytes in the standard are
     prepared at the same concentrations.  For instance, the blank for ICP
     must be formatted "SO".
                                   B-13                                10/91

-------
                                  SECTION III

                            FORM INSTRUCTION GUISE



This section contains specific  instructions for  the  coupletion of all
required Inorganic Data Reporting Forms.   This section is  organized into the
following Parts:

     A.   General Information  and Header InforaatiGu-

     B.   Cover Page  -  [COVER  PAGE -  LCIN]

     C.   Analysis Data Sheet   [FORM  I  -  LCIN]

     D.   Initial and Continuing Calibration Verification  [FORM II - LCIN]

     E.   CRDL  Standards   [FORM  III - LCIN]

     F.   Linear Range Standards   [FORM IV  - LCIN]

     G.   Blanks [FORM V  - LCIN]

     H.   ICP and ICP/MS Interference Check Sample   [FORM VI-  LCIN]

     I.   Spike Sample Recovery   [FORM VII  - LCIN]

     J.   Duplicates   [FORM VIII - LCIN]

     K.   Laboratory  Control Sample   [FORM  IX - LCIN]

     L.   Serial Dilution  [FORM X -  LCIN]

     M.   Standard Addition Results   [FORM  XI - LCIN]

     N.   Instrument  Detection Limits  [FORM XII  - LCIN]

     0.   ICP and ICP/MS Interelement Correction Factors   [FORM XIII  -  LCIN]

     P.   ICP and ICP/MS Tuning  and Response Factor  Criteria   [FORM XTV -
          LCIN]

     Q.   ICP/MS Internal  Standards Summary   [FORM XV - LCIN]

     R.   Analysis Run Log (A)  [FORM XVI - LCIN]

     S.   Analysis Run Log (B)  [FORM XVII  -  LCIN]

     T.   Standard Solutions Sources  [FORM XVIII -  LCIN]

     U.   Sample Log-In Sheet [Form DC-1]

     V.   Document Inventory Sheet [Form DC-2]


                                   B-14                                 10/91

-------
A.
General Information and Header Information

Values must be  reported on the hardcopy data reporting fonts according
to the individual  form instructions in this Section.  Each fora
submitted must  be  filled out completely for all analytes and samples
before proceeding  to the next form of the same type.  Multiple forms
cannot be submitted in place of one form if the information on those
forms can be submitted on one form.

All characters  that appear on the data reporting forms presented  in the
contract (Exhibit  B, Section IV) must be reproduced by the Contractor
when submitting data,  and the format of the foxas submitted oust  be
identical to that  shown in the contract.  Mo information may be added,
deleted, or moved  from its specified position without prior written
approval of Sift}.   The names of the various fields and analytes (i.e. ,
•Lab Code", "Aluminum") must appear as they do on the forms in the
contract,  including the options specified in the form.

Six pieces of information are common to the header sections of each data
reporting form.  These are:   Lab Name, Contract,  Lab Code,  Case No., SAS
No.,  and SDG No.  This information must be entered on every form and
must match on all  forms.

The "Lab Name" must be the name chosen by the Contractor to identify the
laboratory.  It may not exceed 25 characters.

The "Contract"  is  the  number of the contract,  including the hyphens,
under which the analyses  were performed.

The "Lab Code"  is an alphabetic code of up to 6 characters, assigned by
SMO,  to identify the laboratory and aid in data processing.  This lab
code shall be assigned by SMO at the time a contract is awarded,  and
must not be modified by the  Contractor,  except at the direction of  SMO.
     The "Case  No."  is the  SMO-assigned Case number  (5  spaces
     associated with the  sample and reported on the  Traffic Report.

     The "SAS No." is (where  applicable)  the SMO-assigned number for analyses
     performed  under Special  Analytical Services.  If samples are to be
     analyzed under  SAS only,  and reported on  these  forms,  then enter SAS No.
     and leave  Case  No. blank.  If samples are analyzed according to a
     Routine Analytical Services  Protocol and  have additional SAS
     requirements, list both  Case No.  and SAS  No.  on all forms.  If the
     analyses have no SAS requirements, leave  "SAS No." blank.  (NOTE:  Some
     samples  in an SDG may have a SAS  No.,  while others do not.)

     The "SDG No." is the Sample  Delivery Group (SDG) number.  The SDG number
     is the EPA Sample Number of  the  first sample received in the SDG.  When
     several  samples are  received together in  the first SDG shipment, the  SDG
     number must be  the lowest sample  number  (considering both alpha  and
     numeric  designations)  in the first group  of samples received under the
     SDG.

     The other  information common to  several of the  forms is the "EPA Sample
     No.".  This number appears either in the  upper  right-hand corner of the

                                   B-15                                10/91

-------
 font, -or as the left column of a  cable  suonarizing data from a nuaber of
 samples.   When "EPA Sample  No.* is  entered into the triple-spaced box in
 the  upper right-hand corner of a  form,  it  must be centered on the middle
 line of the three  lines  that comprise the  box.

 All  field samples  and quality  control samples must be identified with an
 EPA  Sample Number.   For  field  samples,  the EPA Sample Number is  the
 unique  identifying number given in  the  Traffic Report that accompanied
 that sample.  The  quality control samples  abbreviations listed in Table
 1 must  be  used as  appropriate.

The Form Suffix for each Form  must  appear  in the two character space
provided after the form number in the bottom section of the Fora.  The
Form Suffix is used to sequentially distinguish between different forms
of the  same type (Form Number).  No two Forms of the same type may have
the same Form Suffix  (see Exhibit H).

All the values substituted  in  the formulas  given in the forme
instructions must be  exactly those  values reported on the form for which
the formula applies.

All results must be transcribed to  Forms II-XVIII from the raw data to
the specified number  of decimal places  that are described in Exhibit B
and Exhibit H.  The raw data result is  to be rounded only when the
number  of  figures in  the raw data result exceeds the •••»<••»• number of
figures specified for that result entry on  that form.  If there  are not
enough  figures in the raw data result to enter in the specified  space
for that result, then zeros must be used for decimal places to the
specified number of reporting decimals  for  that result for a specific
form.  The following  examples of floating  decimal places are provided:
Fflu Data Result
5.9
5.99653
95.99653
995.99653
9995.996
99995.9
999995.9
Soecified Forw^t
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
(to
(to
(to
(to
(to
(to
(to
three
three
three
three
three
three
three
decimal
decimal
decimal
decimal
decimal
decimal
decimal
Correct Entrv on Form
places)
places)
places)
places)
places)
places)
places)
5.900
5.997
95 . 997
996.00
9996.0
99996.
invalid
For rounding off numbers to the appropriate level of precision,  observe
the following common rules.  If the figure following those to be
retained  is less than 5, drop it  (round down).  If the figure is greater
than  5, drop it and increase the  last digit to be retained by 1  (round
up).   If  the figure following the last digit  to be retained equals 5 and
there are no digits to  the right  of the 5 or  all digits to the right of
the 5 equal zero, then  round up if the digit  to be retained is odd, or
round down if that digit is even.  See also Rounding Rules entry in
Glossary  (Exhibit G).

Before evaluating a number for being  in  control  or  out of control of a
certain limit, the number evaluated must  be  rounded using EPA rounding
rules to  the significance reported for that  limit.  For  instance, the
control limit for an ICV is plus  or minus 10% of the  true value.  A
percent recovery value  of 110.4 would be  considered in control while a

                              B-16                                10/91

-------
     value of 110.6 would be considered out of control.   In addition, a value
     of 110.50 would be in control while a value  of 110.51 would be out of
     control.

B.   Cover Page [Cover Page - LCIN]

     This font is  used to list all field samples,  duplicates,  spikes, and
     perfomance evaluation sanples  analyzed within a Saople Delivery Group,
     and to provide certain analytical info mat ion and general consents.   It
     is also the document that is  signed by the Laboracory Manager to
     authorize and release all data and deliverables  associated with the  SDG.

     Complete  the  header information according to  the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     The "SOW  No."  is  the SMO-designated number Chat  indicates  Che version of
     Che method under  which analyses  in the data package have been performed.
     For samples analyzed using this  method, enter  "10/91"  for  "SOW Mo."

     Under  "EPA Sample No.",  enter the  EPA Sample No. of each field sample,
     (including spikes, duplicates, and  the PE sample) to eight  spaces, that
     required analysis within  the SDG.  Spikes must contain an  "S"  suffix  and
     duplicates a "D" suffix.  These sample numbers must be listed on Che
     form in ascending alphanumeric order using Che EBCDIC  convention.  Thus,
     if MAB123  is the lowest  (considering both alpha and numeric characters)
    EPA Sample No. within  the SDG, it would be entered in  the first  EPA
    Sample No. field.  Samples would be listed below it, in ascending
    sequence   - MAB124, MAB125, MAC111, MAllll, MAllllD, MA1111S,  etc.

    All EPA Sample Nos. must be listed  in ascending alphanumeric order,
    continuing to Che following Cover  Page if applicable.

    Under "Lab Sample ID.",  a Lab Sample ID.  (Co ten spaces) may be  entered
    for each EPA Sample No.  If a Lab Sample ID is entered, it must be
    entered identically  (for  each EPA Sample No.) on all associated  data.

    Enter "YES* or "NO"  in answer to each of  the two questions  concerning
    ICP and ICP/MS corrections.  Each question must be explicitly answered
    with a. "YES" or a "NO".  The third question must be answered  with a
     "YES" or "NO" if the answer to the second question is  "YES".   It should
    be  left blank if the answer to the second question is  "NO".

    Under "Comments", enter any statements relevant  Co the analyses
    performed under the  SDG as a whole.

    Each Cover Page must be  signed,  in original, by  the Laboratory Manager
    or the Manager's designee and dated, to authorize the  release and verify
    the contents of all  data and  deliverables associated with  an  SDG.

    For  "Name", enter  the  first and  last name (to  25 spaces) of the person
    whose signature appears  on the Cover Page.
                                  B-17                                10/91

-------
     For "Date*,  enter the date (formatted MM/DD/YY)  on which the Cover Page
     is signed.

     For "Title",  enter the title  (to 25 spaces)  of the person whose
     signature appears on the  Cover Page.

C.   AMJy»i« Data Sheet [Fora I -  LCXN]

     This form is  used to tabulate  and report  sample  analysis results for
     target analytes  (Exhibit  C).

     Complete the  header information according to the instructions  in Part A
     and as follows.

     For "Lab Sample  10",  enter the  laboratory sample ID for  the  EPA sample
     number listed on the form if one  was designated,  as listed on  the Cover
     Page.

     "Date  Received*  is  the date (formatted MM/DD/YY)  of sample receipt at
     the  laboratory,  as  recorded on  the  Traffic Report,  i.e.,  the Validated
    Time of  Sample Receipt (VTSR).

    Under  the column labeled  "Concentration",  enter  for each analyte  either
     the value of  the  result (if the concentration  is greater than or  equal
     to  the Instrument Detection Limit),  or the value of the  Instrument
     Detection Limit  for  the analyte corrected for  any dilutions  (if the
     concentration is  less than the  Instrument Detection Limit).

     Analytical results must be reported to two significant figures  if the
     result value  is  less than 10; to  three significant figures if  the result
     value  is greater than or  equal  to 10.  NOTE: This requirement  for
     reporting results to two  or three significant  figures applies  to Form I-
     LCIN only.  Follow the specific  instructions for reporting all other
     results  on required forms as described in this exhibit.

     Under the columns labeled "C",  "Q" ,  and "M*, enter result qualifiers as
     identified below.   If additional  qualifiers are  used, their  explicit
     definitions must be  included on the Cover Page in the Comments section.

     Form I includes  fields for three  types of result qualifiers.   These
     qualifiers must  be  completed as follows:

     o   C  (Concentration) qualifier --  Enter  "U" if  the reported value was
        obtained  from a  reading that  was less than the Instrument Detection
        Limit (IDL).

     o   Q  qualifier  -- Specified entries and  their meanings  are  as follows:

        E   -   The  reported value is estimated because of  the presence  of
                 interference.
        M   -    Duplicate injection (exposure) precision not met.
         N   -    Spiked sample recovery not within  control limits.
                                   B-18                                10/91

-------
     3  -    The reported value was determined by the Method of Standard
             Additions (MSA).
     *  -    Duplicate analysis not within control limits.
     +  -    Correlation coefficient for the MSA is less than 0.995.

     Entering "E",  "S",  or "+" is mutually exclusive.  Ho  combination of
     these  qualifiers can appear in the  same field for an  analyte.

 o  M (Method)  qualifier --  Enter:

      -   "P * for IvT.
         "M " for 1C*,-•••'••••
         •H " for HYICP
         "F * for Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption
         "A " for Flame Atomic Absorption
         "PM* for ICP when microwave digestion is used
         "MM" for ICP/MS when microwave digestion is used
         *HM" for HYICP when microwave digestion is used
         "FM" for Graphite Furnace AA when microwave digestion is used
         "AM" for Flame  AA when microwave digestion is used
         "CV- for Cold Vapor AA
         "AV" for Automated Cold Vapor AA
         •AS* for Semi-Automated Spectrophotometric
         "C " for Manual Spectrophotometric
        *CA"  for Medi-distillation Spectrophotometric
        "1C"  for Ion Chromatography
        "AC"  for Automated Spectrophotometric
        "IS*  for Ion Selective Electrode (Potentiometrie)
        "NR"  if the analyte  is not required to be analyzed
        "   "  if no  results for the analyte  appear on the  fora

A brief physical description of the sample before  and after preparation
must be reported in the fields for Color. Clarity, and Viscosity.   The
following descriptive terms are required:

      Color         -   red, blue, yellow, green,  orange, violet, white,
                       colorless, brown, grey,  or black

      Clarity       -   clear, cloudy, or opaque
      Viscosity     -   nonviscous or viscous
Mote any significant changes that occur  during sample preparation  (i.e.,
emulsion formation) in the Comments  field.  Enter  any sample-specific
comments concerning the analyte results  in  the Comments field.

Initial and Continuing Calibration Verification  [Font II  - HCIH]

This fora  is used to report  analyte  recoveries from calibration
solutions.

Complete the header information according to the instructions in Part A
and as follows.

Under "WOMN", enter the number of  the wavelength or mass  number for
which the  results of each  analyte  are reported on the Form.   The
Wavelength or Mass Number  is a. number assigned to each  wavelength (mass
or detector configuration  for  ICP/MS) used  when  more  than one wavelength

                               B-19                                 10/91

-------
 (mass  or detector configuration for ICP/MS) is used to obtain data for
 an  analyte in the SDG.  A wavelength number of "1* is assigned to the
 longest wavelength used for the analyte in the SDG.  A wavelength number
 of  "2" is assigned to the second longest wavelength and so on.  A mass
 number of "1" is assigned to the greatest mass or the most sensitive
 detector configuration of the same mass used for the analyte in the SDG.
 A mass number "2" is assigned to the second greatest mass or the less
 sensitive detector configuration of the same mass and so on.  The field
 must be left blank if a single wavelength (or mass for ICP/MS) is used
 to  obtain data for an analyte in the SDG.

 Under  "Initial Calibration True",  enter the value (in ug/L,  to two
 decimal places) of the concentration of each analyte in the  Initial
 Calibration Verification Solucion.  If the analyte is not analyzed for,
 leave the field empty.

Under 'Initial Calibration Found", enter the most recent value (in ug/L,
 to  three decimal places),  of the concentration of each analyte measured
 in  the Initial Calibration Verification Solution.

Under "Initial Calibration %R",  enter the value (to the nearest whole
 number) of the percent recovery  computed according to the following
 equation:

         Found(ICV)
 %R - 	 x 100
         True(ICV)

Where, True (ICV) is the true concentration of the analyte in the Initial
Calibration Verification Solution and Found(ICV)  is the found
concentration of the analyte in the Initial Calibration Verification
Solution.

Under "Continuing Calibration True", enter the value (in ug/L, to two
decimal place) of the concentration of each analyte in the Continuing
Calibration Verification Solution.  If the analyte is not analyzed for,
 leave the field empty.

Under "Continuing Calibration Found", enter the value (in ug/L,' to three
 decimal places) of the concentration of each analyte measured in the
 Continuing Calibration Verification Solution.

 Note that the fora contains two "Continuing Calibration Found* columns.
 The column to the left must contain values for the first Continuing
 Calibration Verification, and the column to the right must contain
 values for the second Continuing Calibration Verification.  The column
 to  the right should be left blank if no second Continuing Calibration
 Verification was performed during the run.

 If  more than one Form II  is  required  to  report multiple  Continuing
 Calibration Verifications,  then the column to  the  left on the  second
 form must contain values  for the  third  Continuing  Calibration
 Verification, the column  to  the right must contain values for  the fourth
 Continuing Calibration Verification,  and so on.
                               B-20                                10/91

-------
     Under "Continuing Calibration %R", enter the value (to the nearest -hole
     number)  of the percent recovery computed according to the following
     equation:

              Found(CCV)
      %R - 	 x 100
                True(CCV)

     where, True(CCV)  is  the true concentration of each analyte, and
     Found(CCV)  is the found concentration of the analyte in the Continuing
     Calibration Verification Solution.

     Note that the fora contains two "Continuing Calibration %R" columns.
     Entries  to  these  columns oust follow the sequence detailed above for
     entries  to  the "Continuing Calibration Found" columns.

     Under "M",  enter  the method used,  as explained in Part  C.

     If more  than one  wavelength or elemental expression is  used to analyze
     an analyte,  submit additional Forms  II as appropriate.

     The order of reporting ICVs and CCVs for each analyte must follow the
     temporal, order in which the standards were run starting with the  first
     Form II  and moving from the left to  the right continuing to the
     following Forms II as appropriate.  For instance, the first ICV for all
     analytes must be  reported on the first Form II.   In a run  where three
     CCVs were analyzed,  the first CCV must be reported in the  left CCV
     column on the first  Form II and the  second CCV must be  reported in the
     right column of the  same fora.   The  third CCV must be reported in the
     left CCV column of the second Form II.  On the second Form II, the ICV
     column and  the right CCV column must be left empty in this example.   In
     the previous example, if a second run for an analyte was needed,  the  ICV
     of that  run must  be  reported on a third Form II and the CCVs follow in
     the same fashion  as  explained before.

     In the case where more than one wavelength or elemental expression is
     used for an analyte in the SDG, all  ICV and CCV results of the longest
     wavelength,  greatest mass, or most sensitive detector configuration from
     all runs must be  reported before proceeding to report  the  results of the
     second longest wavelength, the second greatest, uutss, or less sensitive
     detector configuration used, and so  on.

E.   CRPL Standards [Form III - LCIN]

     This form is used to report analyte  recoveries from analyses  of  the CRDL
     Standards.

     Complete the header information according to the  instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     Under "WOMN" ,  enter the wavelength or mass number as explained in Part
                                   B-21                                10/91

-------
      Under "Initial  True",  encer  the value  (in ug/L, to  two decimal places)
      of Che concentration of each analyte in  the CRDL Standard  Source
      Solution  that was  analyzed for analytical sanples associated with  the
      SDG.

      Under  "Initial  Found",  enter the value (in ug/L, to three  decimal
      places) of the  concentration of each analyte measured in the CRDL
      Standard  Solution  analyzed at the beginning of each run.

      Under  "Initial  %R", enter  the value (to  the nearest whole  number) of the
      percent recovery computed  according to the following equation:

             CRDL Standard Initial Found
      %R  -  —	   x 100
                  CRDL  Standard True

     Under  "Final Found", enter the value (in ug/L, to three decimal places)
     of the concentration of each analyte measured in the CRDL  Standard
     Solution analyzed at the end of each run.

     Under "Final %R",  enter the value  (to  the nearest whole number)  of the
     percent recovery computed according to  the following equation:

           CRDL Standard Final Found
     %R - ——•	   x 100
               CRDL Standard True

     Note that  for every initial solution reported there  must be a final one.
     However, the  opposite  is not  true.   If  a  CRDL Standard was  required to
     be analyzed in the  middle of  a run (to  avoid exceeding the  8-hour
     limit), it must  be  reported in the "Final Found1*  section of this  form.

     Under "M", enter the method used,  as explained in Part C.

     If more CRDL standards  analyses were required or  analyses were perfo
     using more than  one wavelength or  elemental  expression per  analyte,
     submit additional Forms III in the order  explained in Fart  D as
     appropriate.

     The order  of  reporting CRDL standards for each analyte must follow the
     temporal order in which the standards were run starting with the first
     Fora III and  continuing to the following  Forms III  as appropriate.   When
     multiple wavelengths or elemental  expressions are used for  one analyte,
     all the results  of  the longer wavelength  or elemental expressions must
     be reported before  proceeding to  the next wavelength or elemental
     expression.

F.   Linear Range  Standards (LRS)   [Fora IV - LCIN]

     This form  is  used to report analyte recoveries from analyses of the
     Linear Range  Standards (LRS).

     Complete the header information according to the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.
                                   B-22                                10/91

-------
Under "WOMN", enter the wavelength or mass number as explained in Part
D.

Under "Initial True", enter the value (in ug/L, to two decimal  places)
of the concentration of each analyte in the LRS Standard Source
Solution that was analyzed for analytical samples associated with the
SDG.

Under "Initial Found", enter the value (in ug/L. to three decimal
places) of the concentration of each analyte measured in the LRS
Standard Solution analyzed at the beginning of each run.

Under "Initial %R", enter the value (to the nearest whole number) of
the percent recovery computed according to the following equation:

     .LRS Standard Initial Found
%R - 	   x 100
          LRS Standard True

Under "Final Found", enter the value (in ug/L, to three decimal places)
of the concentration of each analyte measured in the LRS  Standard
Solution analyzed at the end of each run.

Under "Final %R", enter the value (to the  nearest whole number) of the
percent recovery computed according to the following equation:

     LRS Standard Final Found
%R - 	   x 100
         LRS Standard True

Note that for every initial solution reported there must be a final
one.  However, the opposite is not true.  If a LRS Standard was
required to be analyzed in the middle of a run (to avoid exceeding the
8-hour limit), it must be reported in the "Final Found" section of this
form.

Under "M", enter the method used, as explained in Part C.

If more LRS standards analyses were required  or analyses were performed
using more than one wavelength or elemental expression per analyte,
submit additional Forms IV in the order explained in Part D as
appropriate.

The  order of reporting LRS standards for each analyte must follow the
temporal order in which the standards were run starting with  the  first
Form IV and continuing to the following Forms IV as appropriate.   When
multiple wavelengths or elemental expressions are used for one analyte,
all  the results  of  one wavelength or elemental expression must be
reported before  proceeding  to the next wavelength.
                              B-23                                10/91

-------
G.   Blanks (Font V - LOIN]

     This fora is used to report analyte concentrations found in the Initial
     Calibration Blank (ICB),  in Continuing Calibration Blanks (CCB),  and in
     the Preparation Blank (PB).

     Complete the header infomation according to  the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     Under "WOMN",  enter the wavelength or  mass number as  explained in Part
      /'<.

     Under "Im.c>'al Calib.  Blank", enter the concentration (in ug/L,  to three
     decimal places)  of  each analyte  in the most recent  Initial Calibration
     Blank.

     Under the "C" qualifier field, for any analyte enter  "U"  if the absolute
     value of the analyte in the blank  is less than the  IOL.

     Under "Continuing Calibration Blank 1", enter the concentration (in
     ug/L, to three decimal places) of each analyte detected in the first
     required Continuing Calibration Blank (CCB)  analyzed after the Initial
     Calibration Blank.  Enter any appropriate qualifier, as explained for
     the "Initial Calibration Blank," to the "C"  qualifier column immediately
     following the "Continuing Calibration Blank 1" column.

     If only one Continuing Calibration Blank was  analyzed, then leave the
     columns labeled "2" and "3* blank.   If two additional CCBs were
     analyzed,  complete the columns labeled "2" and "3", in accordance with
     the instructions for the "Continuing Calibration Blank 1" column.  If
    more than two Continuing Calibration Blanks were analyzed, then complete
    additional Forms V as appropriate.

    Under "Preparation Blank", enter the concentration (in ug/L,  to three
    decimal places) of each analyte in the Preparation Blank.  Enter any
    appropriate qualifier, as explained for the "Initial Calibration Blank,"
    to the "C" qualifier column immediately following the "Preparation
    Blank" column.

    For all blanks,  enter the concentration of each analyte (positive or
    negative)  measured above the IDL or below the negative value of the IDL.

    Under "M",  enter the method used, as explained in Part C.

    If more than one wavelength or elemental expression is used to analyze
    an analyte,  submit additional Forms V as appropriate.

    The order of reporting ICBs and CCBs for each analyte must follow  the
    temporal order in which the blanks were run starting with  the first  Form
    V and moving from left to right and continuing to the following Forms  V
    as explained in Part D.  When multiple wavelengths or elemental
                                  B-24                                j.o/91

-------
                           ;                             7         -
     expressions are used for the analysis of one analyte,  all Che results of
     the longer wavelength, greater mass,  or more sensitive detector
     configuration must be reported before proceeding to the next wavelength
     or elemental expression.

H.   ICP AMD ICP/MS Interference Check Sample [Fora 71 - LCIH]

     This form is used to report Interference Check Sample  (ICS)  results for
     each ICP instrument used  in Sample Delivery Group analyses.

     Complete the header information according to the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     For "Instrument  ID Number",  enter  an  identifier  that uniquely identifies
     a  specific instrument  within the Contractor laboratory.  Mo  two
     Instruments within a laboratory may have  the  same  Instrument ID  Number.

     Under  "WOMN",  enter the wavelength or mass number as explained in Part
     D.

     Under  "True  Sol. A", enter the  true concentration (in ug/L,  to two
     decimal  places) of each analyte analyzed by ICP that is present in
     Solution A.  A concentration of zero "0" must be entered for the
     analytes analyzed  by ICP or ICP/MS that have no true value.

     Under  "True Sol. AB", enter the true concentration (in ug/L, to two
     decimal places) of each analyte present in Solution AB.  A concentration
     of zero  "0* must be entered for the analytes analyzed by ICP or ICP/MS
     that have no true value.

    Under  "Initial Found Sol.  A", enter the concentration (in ug/L, to three
    decimal places) of each analyte analyzed by ICF that resulted from the
     initial analysis of Solution A as required in Exhibit E.

    Under  "Initial Found Sol.  AB", enter the concentration (in ug/L,  to
    three  decimal places) of each analyte analyzed by ICP that resulted from
    the initial analysis of Solution AB as required in Exhibit E.

    Under  "Initial Found %R" ,  enter the value (to the nearest whole number)
    of the percent recovery computed according to the following equation:

           Initial Found Solution AB
    %R  -	   x 100
                True Solution AB

    Leave  the field empty is True Solution AB is equal to zero.

    Under  "Final Found Sol. A",  enter the concentration (in ug/L,  to  three
    decimal places) of each analyte analyzed by ICP that resulted from  the
    final  analysis of  Solution A as required  in Exhibit E.

    Under  "Final Found Sol. AB", enter the concentration (in ug/L, to three
    decimal places) of each analyte analyzed by ICP that resulted from  the
    final  analysis of  Solution AB as*required in Exhibit E.
                                  B-25                                10/91

-------
     Under  "Final Found %R", enter the value  (Co ehe nearest whole number)  of
     the percent recovery computed according  to the following  equation:

             Final Found Solution AB
     %R  -  	   x 100
                 True Solution AB

     Leave the field empty if True Solution AB is equal  to zero.

     For All Found values of solutions A and AB,  enter the concentration
     (positive, negative, or zero) of each analyte at each wavelength nr
     elemental expression used for analysis by the instrument.

     Note that for every initial solution reported there must be a final one.
     However,  the opposite is not true.   If an ICS  was  required to be
     analyzed in the middle of a run (to avoid exceeding the 8-hour limit) ,
     it must be reported in the "Final Found"  section of this fora.

     Under "M", enter the method used, as  explained in  Part C.

     If more ICS analyses were  required, submit additional Forms VI  as
     appropriate.

     The order of reporting ICSs for  each  analyte must  follow the temporal
     order in which the  standards were run starting with the  first Form VI
     and continuing to the following  Forms VI  as appropriate.   When  multiple
     wavelengths or elemental expressions  are  used  for  one analyte,  all the
     results of longer wavelength,  greater mass, or more sensitive detector
     configuration must  be reported before proceeding to the  next wavelength
     or elemental expression in the same manner as  described  in Part D.

I-   Spike Sample Recovery [Form VII  - LCIN]

     This form is used to report results for the matrix spike.

     Complete the header information according to  the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     In the "EPA Sample  No." box, enter  the  EPA Sample  Number (8 places
     maximum)  of the sample from which the spike  results on this form were
     obtained.  The number must be centered in the box.

     Under "WOMN",  enter the wavelength or mass number  as explained in Part
     D.

     Under "Control Limit %R" , enter "75-125" if  the spike added value was
     greater than or equal to one-fourth of the sample result value.  If not,
     leave the field empty.

     Under "Sample Result (SR)", enter  the value (in ug/L, to  three decimal
     places),  of the concentration for  each analyte in the sample (reported
     in the EPA Sample No. box)  on which  the  matrix spike was  performed.
     Enter the IDL value if the  analyte was not detected.  Enter  any
     appropriate qualifier, as explained  in Part C, to the "C"  qualifier
     column immediately following the "Sample Result (SR)" column.


                                   B-26                               10/91

-------
      Under "Spiked Sample Result (SSR)",  enter Che value (in ug/L,  to three
     .decimal  places),  of the  concentration for each analyte  in the  matrix
      spike saaple.   Enter the IDL value if the analyte was not detected.
      Enter any  appropriate qualifier,  as  explained in Part C,  to  the "C*
      qualifier  column  immediately following the "Spiked Sample Result (SSR)"
      column.

      Under "Spike  Added (SA)", enter the  value (in ug/L,  to  three decimal
      places)  of the concentration of each analyte  added to the sample.   If
      the  "Spike Added*  concentration is specified  in the  contract,  the  value
      added and  reported must  be  that specific  concentration  in ug/L.

      Under "%R", enter  the value  (to the  nearest whole number)  of the percent
      recovery for  all spiked  analytes  computed according  to  the following
      equation:

              (SSR  -  SR)
     %R  -  	  x 100
                    SA

     %R must be reported, whether it is negative, positive or zero.

     A value of zero must be used for SSR or SR if the analyte value is less
     than the IDL.

     Under "Q",  enter "N" if the Spike Recovery (%R) is out of the control
     limits (75-125) and the Spike Added  (SA) is greater than or equal to
     one-fourth of the Sample Result (SR).

     Under "M",  enter method used as explained in Part C.

     If different samples were used for spike sample analysis of different
     analytes, additional Forms VII must be 'submitted for each sample as
     appropriate.

     Use additional Forms VII for each sample on which a required spike
     sample analysis was performed.

J.   Duplicates  [Form VIII - LCIN]

     The duplicates form is used to report results of duplicate analyses.

     Complete the header information according  to  the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     In the "EPA Sample No." box, enter the EPA Sample Number  (8 places
     maximum) of the sample from which  the duplicate results on this  form
     were obtained.  The number must be centered in the box.

     Under "WOMN", enter the wavelength or mass number as explained  in  Part
     D.
                                   B-27                                10/91

-------
     Under "Control Limit", enter the numerical value of the IOL (in ug/L, to
     two decimal places) for the analyte if the sample or duplicate values
     were less than Sx IDL.  If both the sample and  duplicate values were
     less than the  IDL or both were greater than or  equal to Sx IDL, leave
     the field empty.

     Under 'Sample  (S)",  enter the original value  (in ug/L,  to three decimal
     places)  of the concentration of each analyte  in the sample (reported in
     the EPA  Sample No.  box)  on which a duplicate  analysis was performed.
     Enter the IDL  value if the analyte was not detected.  Enter any
     appropriate qualifier, as explained in Part C,  to the "C" qualifier
     column immediately following the "Sample  (S)" column.

     Under "Duplicate  (D)", enter the value (in ug/L,  to three decimal
     places)  of each analyte  in the Duplicate  sample (reported in the EPA
     Sample No.  box).   Enter  the IDL value if  the  analyte was not detected.
     Enter any appropriate  qualifier,  as explained in Part C,  to the "C"
     qualifier column  immediately following the "Duplicate (D)" column.

     Under "RPD", enter  the  absolute value (to the  nearest; whole  number)  of
     the Relative Percent Difference for  all  analytes detected above the IDL
     in  either  the  sample  or  the  duplicate,  computed  according  to the
     following equation:
                 IS -  D|
     RPD  -  	  x 100
                 (S +  D)/2

     A value  of zero must be  substituted for S or  D  if the analyte
     concentration  is  less  than the IDL in either  one.  If the analyte
     concentration  is  less  than the IDL in both S  and D, leave the RPD field
     empty.

     Under "Q", enter  "*" if the duplicate analysis  for the  analyte is out of
     control.  If both sample and duplicate values are greater than or equal
     to Sx IDL, then the RPD must be less than or  equal to 20% to be in
     control.  If either sample or duplicate values  are less than Sx IDL,
     then the absolute difference between the  two  values must be less than or
     equal to the IDL  to be in control.  If both values are  below the IDL,
     then no  control limit is applicable.

     Under "M", enter  method used as explained in  Part C.

     Use additional Forms VIII for each sample on  which a required  duplicate
     sample analysis was performed.
K.   laboratory Control Sample [Form IX - LCIH1

     This form is used to report results for the Laboratory Control  Sample.

     Complete the header information according to the instructions  in Part A
     and as follows.

     If no analytes were analyzed by a certain method or  if the analyte was
     not required to be analyzed then leave the appropriate spaces  empty.


                                    B-28                                 10/91

-------
      Under "WOMN". enter the wavelength or mass number as explained in  Part
      D.

      Under "Limits", enter the lower limit (in ug/L, to two decimal places)
      in the left column, and the upper limit (in ug/L, to one decimal place)
      in the right column for each analyte in the LCS Source solutions.

      Under "True", enter the value (in ug/L,  to two decimal places) of  the
      concentration of each analyte in the LCS Standard Source.

      Under "Found",  enter the measured concentration (in ug/L,  to three
      decimal  places) of each analyte found in the LCS solutions.   Enter the
      IDL value if the analyte was not detected.

      Under "C",  enter "U"  or  leave empty,  to  describe the  found value  of the
      LCS,  as  explained in  Part C.

      Under "%R",  enter  the value  of  the percent  recovery  (to the  nearest
      whole number) computed according to the  following equation:

               LCS Found
      %R  - 	   x 100
                 LCS True

      If the analyte concentration is less than the IOL, a value of zero  must
     be substituted for the LCS found.

     Under "M", enter method used as explained in Part C.

     Submit additional Forms IX as appropriate, if more than one LCS was
     required.  In addition,  submit additional Forms IX if more than one
     wavelength,  mass, or method was used to determine an analyte for a
     sample, as described in Part D:

L.   Serial Dilution [Form X - LCIN]

     The Serial Dilution Form is  used to report results of serial dilution
     analyses.

     Complete  the header information according to the instructions in Part A
     and as follows.

     In the "EPA Sample No."  box,  enter the EPA Sample Number (8 places
     maximum)  of the  sample from  which the duplicate results on this form
     were obtained.  The number must be centered in the box.

     Under "WOMN", enter the  wavelength or mass number as explained in Part
     D.

     Under "Initial Sample Result (I)", enter the measured value  (in ug/L, to
     three decimal places)  of the concentration of each analyte in the
     undiluted sample (reported in the EPA Sample No. box) on which a Serial
     Dilution  analysis was. jfer*ortned.' ^nt&r.che IDL value if the analyte
                                   B-29
                                                                       10/91

-------
      was not decected.   Encer any appropriate qualifier,  as explained in Part
      C,  co the -C*  qualifier  column immediately following Che  "Initial Sample
      Result (I)"  column.

      Note chat the  Initial Sample  concentration for an analyte does not have
      to  equal Che value  for ChaC analyte reported on Fora I.   It  is the value
      of  the analyte concentration  (uncorrected  for dilution) Chat is within
      the linear range of the  instrument.

      Under "Serial Dilution Result  (S)", enter  Che measured concentration
      value (in ug/L, to  three decimal places) of each analyte  in  the serially
      diluted sample (reported in Che EPA Sample No. box).  Enter  the IOL
   .   value multiplied by  five if Che analyte was not detected.   Enter any
      appropriate  qualifier, as explained in Part C, to Che "C"  qualifier
      column immediately following Che "Serial Dilution Result  (S)"  column.

     Noce  Chat che Serial Dilucion ResulC (S) is obtained by multiplying by
     five  the  instrument measured value (in ug/L) of the serially diluted
     sample.  In addition, che "C" qualifier for che serial dilution must be
     established based on che serial dilution resulc before correcting  it for
     Che dilution, regardless of che value reported on Che form.

     Under  "% Difference", enter che absolute value (Co  Che nearest whole
     number) of che percent difference in concentraCion  of required analytes,.
     between che inicial sample and che diluted sample (adjusted for
     dilution) for all analytes detected above Che  IDL in che sample,
     computed according Co Che following equation:

                  |I •  S|
     RPD  -  	  x 100
                      I

     A value of zero muse be substituted for S  if  che analyte  concentraCion
     is less Chan Che IDL.  If che analyte  concentration is less Chan Che IDL
     in I, leave che "% Difference" field empty.

     Under "Q", enter "E" if che % difference value is greater  than 10%  and
     Che  original  sample concencracion reported on  Form  I is greater  than SO
     times the IDL.

     Under "M", enter method used as explained in Part C.

     Use  additional Forms X for each sample on which a required serial
     dilution analysis  was performed.

M.   Standard Addition Results [Form XI - LCIM]

     This form is  used to report the results of samples  analyzed using che
     Method of Standard Additions (MSA).

     Complete the header information according to the instructions  in Part  A.
                                   B-30                                10/91

-------
 Under "EPA Sample No.", -ncer Che EPA Sample Numbers (8 places maximum)
 of all analytical samples analyzed using MSA.   This includes reruns by
 MSA (if the first MSA was out of control) as explained in Exhibit E.

 A  maximum  of 32  samples can be entered on this form.  If additional
 samples  required MSA,  submit additional Forms XI.   Samples must be
 listed in  alphanumeric order per analyte, continuing Co the next Form XI
 if applicable.

 Under "An",  enter  the  chemical  symbol (3 ipaces maximum)  for each
 analyte  for  which MSA  was required for eac.-   >wple listed.   The analytes
 must  be  in alphabetic  listing of  Che  chemical  symbols.

 Results  for  different  samples for  each analyte  must be  reported
 sequentially, with the analytes ordered  according  to Che  alphabetic
 listing  of their chemical symbols.  For  instance,  results for As
 (arsenic)  in samples MAAllO, MAAlll, and MAA112 would be reported  in
 sequence,  followed by  Che result for Pb  (lead)  in MAAllO etc.

Under  "Zero  Found" (y^), enter the measured value in absorbance or
 intensicy units (Co three decimal places) for Che analyte before any
addition is performed.

Under  "First Added" (X2), enter the final concentration in ug/L (to cwo
decimal places) of the  analyte (excluding sample contribution) after the
first addition to the sample analyzed by MSA.

Under  "Firsc Found* (y£), encer Che measured value in absorbance or
 intensicy units (to cwo decimal places) for Che analyte in Che sample
solution spiked with Che first addition.

Under  "Second Added* (X3),  enter Che final concencration in ug/L (to Cwo
decimal places) of Che  analyte (excluding sample contribution) after Che
second addicion Co the  sample analyzed by MSA.

Under  "Second Found" (y3),  enter the measured value  in absorbance  or
 intensity  units (to three decimal places) for Che analyte in Che sample
solution spiked with the second addicion.

Under  "Third Added" (x^), enter the final concentration in ug/L (to
 three  decimal places)  of the analyte  (excluding sample contribution)
after  Che  third addition to the sample analyzed by MSA.

Under  "Third Found" (y4), enter the measured value  in absorbance or
 intensity  units (to three decimal  places) for  the  analyte  in Che  sample
solucion spiked with Che third addition.

Note  chac  "Zero Found",  "First Found",  "Second Found",  and "Third Found"
must have  Che same dilution factor.

Under  "Final Cone.", enter the final  analyte  concentration (in ug/L, to
 three  decimal places)  in the sample as determined  by MSA computed
 according  to the following formula:

 Final  Cone.  -  -  (x-intercept)

                               B-31                                10/91

-------
                                                              X
 Note Chat the final concentration of an analyte does not have to  equal
 the value for that analyte which  is  reported on Fora I for  that sample.

 Under "r",  enter the correlation  coefficient (to three decinal places)
 that is obtained for the  least squares regression line representing the
 following points (x,y):(0.0,  "Zero Found"), ("First Added",  "First
 Found"),  ("Second Added", "Second Found"), ("Third Added",  "Third
 Found").

 Note that the correlation coefficient oust be calculated using the
 ordinary  least squares  linear regression  (unweighted) according to  the
 following formula:

 r	4  I  xjyj  -  I *i I yi	
     l*.Z«i2-  (Zxi)2]V2 [4£yi2_ ( I


Where, x^ - 0

Under  "Q", enter "+" if r is less than 0.995.   If r is greater than or
equal  to 0.995, then leave the field empty.

Under  "M", enter method used as explained in Part C.



This form documents the Instrument Detection Limits for each instrument
that the laboratory used to obtain data for the Sample Delivery Group.
Only the instrument and wavelengths used to generate data for the SDG
must be included.

Complete the header information according to the instructions in Part A
and as follows.

Enter  the "Instrument ID Number" for each instrument used to produce
data for the SDG, as explained in Section H.

For "Method", enter the method of analysis as explained in Part C.

Enter  the date  (formatted MM/DD/YY) on which the IDL values were
determined for use.  This date must not exceed any of the analysis dates
for that instrument in the SDG data package.  Also, it must not precede
them by more than three calendar months.

Under  "Wavelength or Mass Number (WOMN)", enter the wavelength or mass
number, as explained in Part D.

Under  "Wavelength", enter the wavelength  in nanometers (to two decimal
places) for each analyte for which an Instrument Detection Limit  (IDL)
has been established and is listed in the IDL column.  If more than  one
wavelength is used for an analyte, use other Forms XII  as appropriate
to report the Instrument Detection Limit.

Under  "Mass", enter the mass to  charge ratio (m/z, nominal unit mass)
for each analyte for which an  Instrument  Detection Limit  (IDL) has been

                               B-32                                10/91

-------
     established and is listed in Che IOL column.  If more than one mass to
     charge ratio is used in Che elemental expression to provide
     quancicacion,  Chen the mass Co charge ratio listed should be Che
     analyce's primary mass in che equation used for quancicacion.  For
     example,  if che elemental expression for che firsC selenium (WOMN) is Se
     - (1.0000)(m/z 78)-(0.1869)(m/z 76) Chen Che Bass reported should be 78.
     If more Chan one mass Co charge ratio is used for an analyce, use
     additional Forms XII as appropriate Co report the Instrument Detection
     Limit.

     Under "Integ.  Time",  enter che integration time (in seconds, to two
     decimal places) used for each measurement taken from each instrument.

     Under "Background, " enter the type of background correction used to
     obcain Furnace AA daCa.  Enter "BS" for Smith Hieftje,  *BO* for
     Deuterium Arc,  or "BZ" for Zeeman background correction.

     Under "CRDL",  enter che ConCracC Required DeCection Li ait (in ug/L) ,  as
     established in Exhibit C.   If detection limics other Chan Chose listed
     in Exhibit C were required such as in SAS analysis, Chose detection
     limits become  che CRDL.  They muse be reported on chis form and used
     anywhere  else  where CRDL is referenced.

     Under "IDL", enter the Instrument Detection Limit (in ug/L) as
     determined by  the laboratory for each analyte analyzed by the instrument
     for which che  ID Number is listed on chis form.  IDLs muse be reported
     Co two significant figures if che IDL value is less Chan 100 and Co
           significanc figures for values above or equal Co 100.
     Use additional Forms XII if more instruments,  wavelengths,  or elemental
     expressions are used.

     Use the Comments section Co indicate alcernacive wavelengChs or masses
     and Che conditions under which Chey are used.

0.   TCP and TCP/MS Intereleaent Correction Factors [Form ZXZZ-LCZH]

     This form documents for each ICP and ICP/MS instrument the interelement
     correction factors applied by the Contractor to obtain data for che SDG.

     Although che correction factors are determined annually (every 12
     calendar months) ,  a copy of the results of the annual interelement
     correction factors muse be included with each SDG data package on Form
     XIII.

     Complete che header information according to instructions  in Part A and
     as follows .

     Enter the  "Instrument ID Number" for each ICP and ICP/MS instrument used
     to produce data for  che SDG, as explained in Seccion H.  If more  Chan
     one ICP inscrumenc is used, submit additional Forms XIII as appropriate.
                                    B-33                                 10/91

-------
 For "Method",  enter the method of analysis  (two  characters maximal)  for
 which the preparations listed on the  form were made.  Use appropriate
 method codes as specified  in Part C.

 Report the date (formatted as MM/DD/YY) on  which these  correction
 factors were determined for use.  This date must not exceed any of the
 analysis dates  reported for that instrument in the SDG  data package.
 Also,  it must not  precede  them by more than 12 calendar months.

 Under "Wavelength  or Mass", list the  wavelength  (in nanometers,  to two
 decimal places)  for ICP instruments,  or the mass to charge ratio (m/z,
 to  nominal unit mass) for  ICP/MS instruments for each analyte analyzed
 by  either one of the two instruments.  If more than one wavelength or
 mass  is used, submit additional Forms XIII  as appropriate.

 Under ."Interelement Correction Factors For:", enter the chemical symbol
 in  the  two-space header field provided to indicate the  analyte  for which
 the corrections  in  that column were applied.

 In the  column,  enter the correction factor  (negative, positive or  zero,
 to seven  decimal places,  10 spaces max 1.mm) for  each corrected analyte
analyzed by ICP.  If an analyte was not corrected for an analyte that  is
listed  in the header of a column,  a zero must be entered to indicate
that the correction was determined to be zero.

Use additional  Forms XIII as appropriate if correction factors for more
than five analytes were applied.

Columns of correction factors for analytes requiring interelement
correction must be entered left to right starting on Form XIII according
 to the  alphabetic order of their chemical symbols starting on the  first
Form XIII and proceeding to the following Form XIII as appropriate.
ICP an«| ^cy/MS Tuning and Response Factor Criteria [Form nv - LCIH]

This form is used for reporting tuning, response factor, and mass
calibration verification results for each ICP/MS run used to report data
in the SDG.

Complete the header information according to the instructions  in Part A
and as follows.

Enter the "Instrument ID Number" for the ICP/MS instrument used  to
produce data on the form, as explained in Section H.  A Form XIV must be
submitted for each ICP/MS analysis run in the  SDG.

For "Run No.", enter the run number  (two spaces maximum) from  which the
information on  the form was taken.  The run number  is a sequential
number for each instrument in the SDG  that  identifies  the  different
analytical runs that are performed on  the same instrument.   The first
run number for an  instrument must be one, the  second oust  be two,  and so
on.
                               B-34                                10/91

-------
    s
 For "Method",  enter the method code (two characters maximum) according
 to the specifications in Part C.

 For "Analysis  Date" ,  enter the date (formatted MM/DD/YY)  of analysis of
 the initial  tuning solution from which the  information on the form was
 taken.

 For "Analysis  Times.  Initial",  enter the time  (in military format -
 HHMM)  of analysis  of  the initial  tuning solution from which the
 information  on this form was  taken.

 For "Analysis  Times,  Final",  enter  the time  (in military  format - HHMM)
 of analysis  of the  final tuning solution from  which the information on
 this form was  taken.

 Under  "%  Relative Abundance,  Initial*,  enter the percent  relative
 abundance (to  two decimal places) calculated from the  intensities
 measured, for  each  of the isotopes  listed, as  a result of analyzing the
 100 ppb  tuning solution  at  the  beginning of each ICP/MS run.  The
 isotopes  are listed in the  first column  from the  left  in  the Tuning
 Section  of the Form.

 Under "%  Relative Abundance,  Final", enter the percent relative
 abundance (to  two decimal places) calculated from the  intensities
 measured, for  each  of the isotopes  listed, as a  result of  analyzing the
 100 ppb  tuning solution  at  the  end  of  each ICP/MS run.  The isotopes are
 listed in the  first column  from the  left in the  Tuning Section  of the
 Form.

 Under "Response Factor,  Initial", enter  the value for  the  measured
 response  factor (in counts  per  second,  to the nearest  whole number)  in
 the 100 ppb tuning solution analyzed at  the beginning  of  each ICP/MS
 run, for  each mass to  charge  ratio  listed in the first column from the
 left in the Response  Factor Section of the Form.

 Under "Response Factor,  Final*, enter  the value for the measured
 response  factor (in counts  per  second,  to the  nearest  whole number) in
 the 100 ppb tuning solution analyzed at  the end of each ICP/MS  run for
 each mass to charge ratio listed in the  first  column from the left in
 the Response Factor Section of  the  Form.

 Under "Observed Mass", enter  the observed mass  (to nominal unit mass)  in
 the 100 ppb tuning  solution analyzed at  the beginning  of  each ICP/MS run
 for each  mass  to charge  ratio listed in the first column  from the left
 in  the Mass Calibration  Section of  the Form.

The values measured and  reported  in the  Tuning,  Response  Factor, and
Mass Calibration Sections of  the  Form  must be  within the  control limits
 listed in the  second  column from  the left in each of the  Sections.

 Note that for  every initial solution reported  there must  be a final one.
 However,  the opposite  is not  true.   If a tuning solution  was required  to
 be  analyzed in the middle of  a  run  (to avoid exceeding the 8-hour
 limit), it must be reported in  the  "Final"  section of this form.
                              B-35                                 10/91

-------
  If more tuning solutions  analyses  were  required,  submit additional Foras
  XIV in the order explained  in  Part D  as appropriate.

  The order of reporting the  tuning  solution results  oust follow the
  teaporal order in which the solutions were run  starting with the  first
  Fora XIV and continuing to  the following Fora XIV,  as  appropriate.

  ICP/MS Interna^  gE.«'i
-------
      including all  QC  operations  applicable  to  che SDG  (formatted according
      Co Table  1,  Exhibit B).  All EPA  sample numbers must be  listed in
      increasing temporal (date and time)  order  of analysis, continuing to Che
      nexc Form XV for  che instrument run  if  applicable.  The  analysis  date
      and time  of  other analyses not associated  with the  SDG,  but  analyzed by
      Che instrument in che reported analytical  run, must be reported.   Those
      analyses  must be identified with  the EPA Sample No. of "ZZZZZZ".
      Samples identified as "ZZZZZZ" need  not have intensities reported for
      internal  standards.

      Under "Time", enter the time  (in  military  format -  HHMM)  at  which each
      analysis  was performed.

      For any particular ICP/MS run, the EPA  Sample No. and time sequence  on
      Form XV and XVI muse be identical.

     Under "Internal Standards %D For:", enter  che chemical symbol of  the
      internal  standard in the two-space header  field provided  to  indicate the
      internal  standard for which che percent differences in that column were
     reported.

     In Che column,  enter the percent relative intensity (to the nearest
     whole number) of che intensity of the internal standard in the EPA
     Sample Number for each sample analysis listed on the form (excluding
     "ZZZZZZ*)  and the intensity of che internal standard in the blank
     calibration standard (SO).   The percent relative intensity (%R) is
     calculated using che following formula:

                     SOI
     %R  -  	  x 100
                      SI

     Where,  che SOI is che intensity of che internal standard  in  che blank
     calibration standard,  and SI is the intensity of internal standard in
     che EPA Sample No. in Che same units.

     Under the "Q" column to the right of each %R column, enter an "E"  if the
     %R for a  field sample,  PES,  duplicate, or spike is less than 30%  or
     greater than 125% for the second time after being run at a five-fold
     dilution.   If the percent relative intensity is greater than 30%  and
     less than 125%, Chen leave Che field empty.

     Columns of internal standard %R must be entered left to  right starting
     wich the internal sCandards of the lower mass on che first Form XV and
     proceeding to che following Form XV as appropriate.

R.   Analysis Run Log (A1 [Form ZVI-LCIN]

     This form is used Co report the sample  analysis run log  for  ICP and
     ICP/MS only.   In addition,  che samples  reported on  this  form must have
     been prepared in che same manner using no  pre-preparation dilution or
     concentration steps.  The results^reporced on Form  I for the samples
     listed on chis form .fo-r'jaaoh ana^te joust  b* .obtained by multiplying
     each analyte's concentration  (in«ug/L)tfrom the instrument by the
     dilution  factor listed on the  form.
                                   B-37                                 10/91

-------
 A run is  defined  as  the  continuous totality of analyses performed by  an
 instrument  throughout  the sequence initiated by, and including,  the
 initial and the final  tuning solution, the first required calibration
 standard  and terminated  by, and including, the continuing calibration
 verification and  blank following the last required analytical sample.

 All field samples and  all quality control analyses (including tuning
 solutions,  ICP serial  dilutions, calibration standards, ICVs, CCVs,
 ICBs, CCBs,  MTS,  CRIs, ICSs, LRSs, LCSs, PBs, duplicates,  PE samples,
 and spikes)  associated with the SDG must be reported on Form XVI.  The
 run must  be  continuous and inclusive of all analyses performed on the
 particular  instrument  during the run.

 Submit one Form XVI per  run if no more than 32 analyses,  including
 instrument calibration,  were analyzed in the run.  If more than 32
 analyses were performed  in the run, submit additional Forms XVI as
 appropriate.

 Complete  the header information according to the instructions in Part A,
 and as follows.

 For "Instrument ID Number", enter the instrument ID number (12  spaces
maximum) which must be an identifier designated by the  laboratory to
uniquely  identify each instrument used to produce data  which are
required  to be reported  in the SDG deliverable.   If more than.one ICP or
 ICP/MS instrument is used, submit additional Forms XVI  as  appropriate.

For "Run No.", enter the run number as explained in Part P.

 For "Method", enter the  method code (two characters maximum) according
 to the specifications  in Part C.

 For "Start Date",  enter  the date (formatted MM/DD/YY)  on which the
 analysis  run was  started.

 For "End Date", enter  the date (formatted MM/DD/YY) on which the
 analysis  run was  ended.

 Under "EPA  Sample No.*,  enter the EPA sample number of each analysis,
 including all QC  operations applicable to the SDG  (formatted according
 to Table  1,  Exhibit B) .  All EPA sample numbers must be listed in
 increasing  temporal  (date and time) order of analysis, continuing to  the
 next Form XVI for the  instrument run if applicable.  The analysis date
 and time  of other analyses not associated with the SDG, but analyzed  by
 the instrument in the  reported analytical run, must be reported.  Those
 analyses  must be  identified with the EPA Sample No. of "ZZZZZ2".

 Under "Prep. Batch Number", enter  the preparation batch number  for each
 sample and  quality control sample  preparation (including  duplicates,
 spikes, LCSs, PBs, and PE  samples)  that are  reported on the Form.  The
 preparation batch number is used to  link the sample analysis with  the
 appropriate  preparation  batch.  It consists  of an ordered combination of
 the date  of preparation  (formatted MMDDYY),  the hour  of preparation  (in
 military  format - HH), and the method of preparation.  The preparation
 batch number must be left justified  and may  not have  any  blank spaces

                              B-38                                10/91

-------
     between its components.  It may not have more than one leading blank.
     Single digit hours and months must be padded to the left with zeros.
     The following are  examples of preparation batch numbers:

       Prep. Batch Number                        Preparation
                                    Hour        Date              Method

       "11308915CV"                  15          11/30/89          CV
       "11038915P "                  15          11/30/89          P
       -01029008F "                  8           01/01/90          F
       "12908F    "                  invalid

     Under "Time*,  enter the time (in military format • HHMM) at which each
     analysis was performed.

     Note that for a particular sample a dilution factor of "1" must be
     entered if the preparation product was analyzed without adding any
     further volume of dilutant or any other solutions  to the sample or an
     aliquot of that sample taken for preparation.

     For supplied solutions such as ICVs.  ICSs,  PESs, and LCSs,  a dilution
     factor must be entered if the supplied solution had to be diluted to a
     dilution different from that specified by the  instructions provided with
     the solution.   The dilution factor  reported in  such a case must be that:
     which would make the  reported true  values on the appropriate fora for
     the solution equal those that were  supplied with the solution.   For
     instance,  I CV-2 (0887)  has a true value of 104.0  ug/L at a 20 fold
     dilution.   If the solution is prepared at a 40  fold dilution, a dilution
     factor of "2"  must be entered on Form  XVI and  the  uncorrected instrument
     reading is compared to a true value of 52 ug/L.  In this example, Form
     II will have a true value of 104.0  regardless  of the dilution used.  The
     found value for the ICV must be  corrected for  the  dilution listed on
     Form XVI  using the following formula:

     Found value on Form II  -  Instrument readout  in ug/L  x  D/F

     Under "Analytes",  enter "X" in the column of the designated analyte to
     indicate  that  the analyte value was used from the  reported analysis to
     report data on any of the forms in the SDG.  Leave the column empty for
     each analyte if the analysis was not used to report the particular
     analyte.

S.   Analysis  Run Log (Bt  [Form XVII-LCIN]

     This form is used to  report the sample analysis run log for each
     instrument used for analysis in the SDG. This  includes ICP and ICP/MS
     analysis runs where conditions for reporting on Form XVI were not met.
     Form XVII is analyte  and method specific.

     A run is defined as the continuous totality of analyses performed by  an
     instrument throughout the sequence initiated by, and including,  the
                                   B-39                                io/91

-------
initial and the final  tuning solution, the first required  calibration
standard and terminated by, and including, the continuing  calibration
verification and blank following the last required analytical sample.
    field samples and all quality control analyses  (including tuning
solutions, serial dilutions, calibration standards, ICVs, CCVs,  ICBs,
CCBs, MTS, CRIs,  ICSs, LRSs, LCSs, PBs, duplicates, PE Samples,  matrix
spikes, analytical spikes, and each addition analyzed for MSA
determination) associated with the SDG muse be reported on  Form  XVII.
The run must be continuous and inclusive of all analyses performed on
the particular instrument during the run.

Submit one Form XVII per run if no more than 32 analyses, including
instrument calibration, were analyzed in the run.  If more  than  32
analyses were performed in the run, submit additional Forms XVII as
appropriate .

Complete the header information according to the instructions in Part  A,
and as follows.

For "Instrument ID Number", enter the instrument ID number  (12 spaces
maximum) which must be an identifier designated by the laboratory to
uniquely identify each instrument used to produce data which are
required to be reported in the SDG deliverable.  If more than one
instrument is used,  submit additional Forms XVII as appropriate.

For "Run No . " , enter the run number as explained in Part P .

For "Method" , enter the method code ( two characters maximum) according
to the specifications in Part C.

For "Start Date", enter the date (formatted MM/DD/YY) on which the
analysis run was started.

For "Analyte", enter the analyte's chemical symbol  (three spaces
maximum) for which the analysis run is being reported on the Form.
Submit a Form XVII for each analyte analyzed.

For "End Date",  enter  the  date  (formatted MM/DD/YY) on which the
analysis run was ended.

For "Retention Tine Window",  enter the retention time window  (in
seconds, to  two  decimal places) established for  the column  used for
analysis of  the  analyte on this form  if  the method used  is  "1C".

For the  "Lower Limit", enter  the  retention time  lower limit (in seconds,
to two  decimal places) for the  ion chroma tography (1C)  column used for
analysis on this form.

For  the "Upper Limit", enter  the  retention time upper limit (in seconds,
to two decimal places)  for the  Ion Chromatography (1C)  column used for
analysis on this, fojmk,    '* ,' ;  .'  '
                               B-40                                10/91

-------
 Note that the difference between the "Upper Limit" and "Lower Limit" of
 the retention time must equal the "Retention Time Window".   If the
 method reported on this form is not "1C",  leave the "Retention Time
 Window",  "Lower Limit", and "Upper Limit"  fields blank.

 Under "EPA Sample No.", enter the EPA sample number of each analysis,
 including all QC operations applicable to the SDG (formatted according
 to Table  1,  Exhibit B).  All EPA sample numbers must be  listed in
 increasing temporal (date and time) order of analysis, continuing to the
 next  Form XVII for the  instrument run if applicable.   The analysis date
 and time  of other analyses not associated with the SDG,  but analyzed by
 the instrument in the reported analytical  run,  must be reported.   Those
 analyses  must be identified with the EPA Sample No.  of "ZZZZZZ".

 Under "Prep.  Batch Number",  enter the preparation batch  number as
 explained in Part R.

 Under "Inl.  Vol.",  enter the  initial  volume  (in mL, to the  nearest whole
 number) of each sample  or aliquot of  the sample taken for preparation
 (distillation,  digestion,  etc.)  for analysis by the method  indicated in
 the header section of the Form.  This  field must have a value  for each
 field sample  listed.

 Under "Fin. Vol.",  enter the  final volume  (in mL,  to the nearest  whole
 number) of the preparation for  each  sample prepared for analysis  by the
method indicated  in the  header  section of  the Form.  This field must
have a value for  each field  sample  listed.

Under "Time", enter the  time  (in military  format  - HHMM)  at which each
analysis was performed.

Under "D/F", enter  the  dilution factor (to two  decimal places) by which
 the final product of  preparation procedure (digestate or  distillate)
 needed to be diluted  for each analysis performed.

 Note  that  for  a particular sample, a  dilution factor of  "1* must  be
 entered if the preparation product was analyzed without  adding any
 further volume of dilutant or any other solution  to the  "Fin.  Vol." of
 Che sample or  an  aliquot of that "Fin.  Vol." listed for  that sample on
 this  form.

 For supplied  solutions  such as  ICVs,  ICSs, and  LCSs, a dilution  factor
 must  be entered  if the  supplied solution had to be diluted  to a  dilution
 different  from that specified by the instructions provided  with  the
 solution.  The dilution factor  reported in such a case must be that
 which would make  the  reported true values  on the appropriate  form for
 the solution equal those that were supplied with the solution.  For
 instance,  ICV-2(0887) has a  true value of 104.0 ug/L at  a 20 fold
 dilution.  If  the solution is prepared at a 40 fold dilution,  a dilution
 factor of  "2"  must be entered on Form XVII and the uncorrected
 instrument reading is compared  to a true value of 52 ug/L.   In this
 example,  Form  II  will have a true value of 104.0 regardless of the
 dilution  used.  The found value for the ICV must be corrected for the
 dilution  listed  on Form XVII  using the following formula:
                               B-41                                10/91

-------
 Found value on Form II  -  Instrument readout in ug/L  x  D/F

 Under "%R",  enter the percent recovery (to two decimal places) for each
 analytical spike analyzed.   Leave the field blank if the analysis
 reported is not an analytical spike.   A %R of "-9999" must be entered
 for the analytical spike if either the sample or the analytical spike
 result is greater than the  calibration range of the  instrument.

 Under "%RSD",  enter the relative standard deviation  of  the  replicate
 exposures or injections for each analysis reported on this  form.

 Under "Retention Time",  enter the retention  time  (in seconds,  to  two
 decimal places)  for each analysis reported on this form.  The  retention
 time must be within the  lower and upper limits reported on  the Form.
 Leave the field  blank If the  method reported on Che  form is  not "1C*.

 Standard Solutions  Sources  [Form ZVIII-LCIH]

 This form is used to  report the  source of each standard solution  on an
 analyte--by-analyte basis used  for  initial  and continuing calibration
 verifications, CRDL,  LRS, ICS, and LCS standards used as a QC analysis
 in the  SDG.

 Complete  the header information  according  to the instructions in  Part  A,
 and as  follows.

 Under "ICV Standard Source",  enter the initial calibration source  (10
 spaces  maximum)  for each analyse  for which ICV results were reported on
 Form II.   For  supplied solutions,  entering "SMC* is not sufficient.
 Supplied solutions  must  be  identified using the codes supplied with the
 solutions  for  identification.  For solutions that are not provided,
 enter sufficient information  in  the available 12 spaces to unequivocally
 identify  the manufacturer and  the  solution used.

 Under "CCV Standard Source", enter the continuing calibration source  (10
 spaces maximum) for each analyte  for which CCV results  were  reported on
 Fora II, as described for the  initial calibration source.

 Under "CRI Standard Source", enter the CRDL  standard source  (10 spaces
 maximum) for each analyte for which CRDL  standard results were  reported
 on  Form III, as described for  the  initial  calibration source.

Under "LRS Standard Source",  enter the Linear Range  Analysis source (10
 spaces maximum) for each analyte for which LRS standard results were
 reported on Form IV,  as  described for  the initial calibration  source.

Under "ICS Standard Source",  enter the ICP and ICP/MS Interference
source  (10 spaces maximum)  for each analyte  for which ICS standard
results were reported on Form VI,  as described for the  initial
calibration source.

Under "LCS Standard Source",  enter the Laboratory Control Sample  source
 (10  spaces maximum) for  each  analyte for  which LCS standard results were
reported on Form IX,  as  described for  the initial calibration  source.
                               B-42                                 10/91

-------
U.   Sample Log-In Sheet [Form DC-1]

     This form is used Co document the receipt and inspection of samples and
     containers.  One original of Form DC-1 is required for each sample
     shipping container, e.g., cooler.  If the samples in a single sample
     shipping container oust be assigned to more than one Sample Delivery
     Group, the original Form DC-1 shall be placed with the deliverables for
     the Sample Delivery Group of the lowest Arabic number and a copy of Form
     DC-1 trust be placed with the deliverables for the other Sample Delivery
     Group(.«->M  The copies should be identified as "copy(ies) , * and the
     locatioi  ; '• the original should be  noted on the copies.

     Sign and dace Oie airbill (if present).   Examine the shipping container
     and record the presence/absence  of  custody seals and their condition
     (i.e.,  intact,  broken)  in item 1 on Form DC-1.   Record the custody seal
     numbers  in item 2.

     Open the  container, remove  the enclosed sample  documentation,  and record
     the presence/absence of chain-of-custody record(s),  SMO  forms  (i.e.,
     Traffic Reports,  Packing Lists),  and airbills or airbill stickers  in
     items 3-5 on Form DC-1.   Specify if there is an  airbill present or an
     airbill sticker  in  item 5 on Form DC-1.   Record  the  airbill or sticker
     number in  item 6.

     Remove the samples  from the  shipping container(s), examine the samples
     and the sample tags (if present), and record the condition of  the  sample
     bottles  (i.e., intact,  broken, leaking) and presence or absence of
     sample tags in items 7  and 8 on Form DC-1.

     Review the sample shipping documents and complete the header information
     described in Part A.  Compare the information recorded on all  the
     documents  and samples and mark the appropriate answer in item  9 on Form
     DC-1.

     If there  are no problems observed during  receipt, sign and date (include
     time) Form DC-1,  the chain-of-custody record, and Traffic Report,  and
     write the sample  numbers on  Form DC-1.  Record  the appropriate sample
     tags and assigned laboratory numbers if  applicable.  The log-in date
     should be recorded  at the  top of Form DC-1 and  the date and time  of
     cooler receipt at the laboratory should  be recorded  in items 10 and 11.
     Cross out unused  columns and spaces.

     If there are problems observed during  receipt,  contact SMO and document
     the contact as well as  resolution of the  problem on  a CLP Communication
     Log.  Following  resolution,  sign and date the forms  as specified  in the
     preceding paragraph and note, where appropriate,  the resolution of the
     problem.

     Record the fraction designation  (if appropriate)  and the specific area
     designation (e.g.,  refrigerator  number)  in the  sample  transfer block
     located  in the  bottom left  corner of Form DC-1.   Sign  and date the
     sample  transfer block.
                                   B-43                                10/91

-------
V.   Document Inventory Sheet (Form DC-2)

     This fora is used to record the inventory of the Complete SDG File (CSF)
     documents which are sent to the Region.

     Organize all CSF documents as described in Exhibit B, Section II and
     Section III.  Assemble the documents in the order specified on Form DC-2
     and Section II and III,  and stamp each page with the consecutive number.
     (Do not number the DC-2  form).   Inventory the CSF by reviewing the
     document numbers and recording page numbers ranges in the column
     provided on the Form DC-2.   If there are no documents for a specific
     document type,  enter an  "NA" in the empty space.

     Certain laboratory-specific documents related to the CSF may not fit
     into a  clearly defined category.   The laboratory should review Form DC-2
     to  determine if it is most appropriate to place  them under No.  29,  30,
     31,  or  32.   Category 32  should be used if there  is no appropriate
     previous category.   These  types of documents  should be described or
     listed  in the blanks under each appropriate category.
                                   B-44                                10/91

-------
     SECTION IV




DATA REPORTING FORKS
      B-45                                 10/91

-------

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS

                                  COVER PAGE
 Lab Name:

 Lab Code:

 SOW No.:
                Contract::
Case No.:
                   EPA Sample No.
SAS No.:
SDG No.
                    Lab Sample ID.
Were ICP and ICP/MS interelement corrections applied?   (Yes/No)
Were ICP and ICP/MS background corrections applied?     (Yes/No)
     If yes, were raw data generated before
     application of background corrections?             (Yes/No)
Comments:
                                                                  ICP   ICP/MS
I certify that this data package is in compliance with the terms  and
conditions of the contract, both technically and for completeness,  for
other than the conditions detailed above.  Release  of the data contained
in this hardcopy data package and in the computer-readable data submitted
on diskette has been authorized by the Laboratory Manager or the
Manager's designee, as verified by the following signature.
Signature:

Date:
                            COVER PAGE
                 Name:

                 Title:

                  - LCIN
                                                                      10/91

-------
 Lab Name:

 Lab Code:
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS


                              ANALYSIS DATA SHEET
                                        EPA SAMPLE NO.
                Contract:
Case No.:
                                             SAS No.:
  SDG No.
 Lab Sample ID:
                              Date Received:
Before:
After:
                            Concentration Units:  ug/L
CAS No.
7429-90-5
74'40-36-Q
7440-38-2
7440-39-3
7440-41-7
7440-43-9
7440-47-3
744O-70-2
7440-48-4
7440-50-8
7439-89-6
7439-92-1
7439-95-4
7439-96-5
7439-97-6
7440-02-7
7440-02-0
7882-49-2
7440-22-4
7440-23-5
7440-28-0
7440-62-2
7440-66-6

1698-44-88


Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Potassium
Nickel
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
NO2/NO3-N

Concentration



























C



























Q



























M



























           Color
          Clarity
Viscosity
Comments:
                            FORM I
             - LCIN
                                                                        10/91

-------
                  f       LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                INITIAL AND CONTINUING CALIBRATION VERIFICATION
 Lab Name:
 Lab Code:
 Run No.:
                Contract:
Case No.:
SAS No.:
SDG No.:
                           Concentration Units: ug/L
\iialyte
Aluminum_
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead 	
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium_
Vanadium_
Zinc
Cyanide 	
Fluoride
NO2/NO3-N
w
O
M
N


—


—

—

—
—
—




Initial Calibration
True Found %R

















































































Continuing Calibration
True Found %R Found %R
1122



































































































































	

M



























Comments:
                              FORM  II
                - LCIN
                              10/91

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                                CRDL STANDARDS
 Lab Name:
 Lab Code:
 Run No.:
                                         Contract:
Case No.:
SAS No.:
SDG No.
Comments:
                          Concentration Units: ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony_
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
NO2/NO3-N

W
O
M
N



























True



























Initial
Found



























%R



























Final
Found



























%R



























M



























                              FORM III
                  - LCIN
                           10/91

-------
                         LOW CONCEMT.ATION INORGANICS
                                   1*.
                                      LRS
 Lab  Name:
 Lab  Code:
 Run  No.:
                 Contract:
Case No.:
SAS No.:
SDG No.
                           Concentration Units: ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Bariua
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
NO2/N03-N

W
0
M
N



























I
True



























nitial
Found



























*R



























Final
Found



























%R



























M



























Comments:
                             FORM IV
                - LCIN
                             10/91

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                                  BLANKS
Lab Mane:
Lab Code:
Run No.: .
Case No.:
Contract:
    SAS No.
SDG No.
                           Concentration Units:  ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum.
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Coooer
Iron
Lead 	
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium_
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
N02/N03-N
W
o
M
N

~~

-




-

^^




-

Initial
Calib.
Blank C

-

























-

•»
-
—
-
—


Continuing calibration Blanks
1 C 2 C 3 C

































-
—















































-

—
—
^^

-





—

_



























-
-
—




—



-

—






Prep.
Blank
C






















































M



























Comments:
                               FORM V
                 - LCIN
                                   10/9.

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                                f



                                      ICS
 Lab  Name:



 Lab  Code:
                Contract:
Case No.:
SAS No.:
SDG No.:
 Instrument  ID Number:
               Run No.:
                           Concentration  Units:  ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum_
Antimony""
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt ~
Copper
Iron
Lead 	
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel 	
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc

w
0
M
N


—

-

-
—
True
Sol . Sol .
A AB
















































Initial Found
Sol . Sol .
A AB %R








































































Final Found
Sol. Sol.
A AB %R








































































M
























Comments:
                              FORM VI
                - LCIN
                                                                             10/9'

-------
                           LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                              SPIKE SAMPLE RECOVERY
                                       EPA SAMPLE NO.
   Lab Name:
   Lab Code:
Case No.:
Contract:
    SAS No.
                                                                 SOG No.
                           Concentration  Units:  ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum
Antinony_
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
r>3"fr"iiimB
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Nickel
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
N02/N03-N

W
0
M
N



























Control
Limit
%R



























Sample
Result (SR)



























C



























Spiked Sample
Result (SSR)



























C


























_
Spike
Added (SA)



























%R



























Q
















^•k










M



























  Comments:
10/91
                            FORM VII
              -  LCIN

-------
 Lab Name:
 Lab Code:
LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
         DUPLICATES

                Contract:
                                                                EPA SAMPLE  NO.
Case No.
SAS No.:
SDG No.
                          Concentration Units:  ug/L
Comments:
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
NO2/NO3-N

w
o
M
N


























_
Control
Limit



























Sample (S)



























c


























_
Duplicate (D)



























c



























RPD



























Q



























M



























                             FORM VIII
                  - LCIN
                                                                          10/91

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION  INORGANICS
                                     LCS
 Lab Name:
 Lab Code:
Case No.:
Contract:
    SAS No.
                                                                SDG No.
                           Concentration Units: ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony_
Arsenic ""
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt ~"
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel 	
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
NO2/NO3-N
W
O
M
N
—


—



—

—

-

—

._
Limits
Lower Upper








•













































True Found






















































c


-


-


—
—


-

-
—
%R



























M



























Comments:
                                  FORM IX
                    - LCIN
                               10/91
                                     10

-------
Lab Name:


Lab Code:
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                                               C


                               SERIAL DILUTION
                Contract:
Case No.:
SAS No.:
                                      EPA SAMPLE NO.
                                      SDG  NO.
                          Concentration Units:  ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
NO2/N03-N

W
O
M
N


























_
Initial Sample
Result (I)



























C



























Serial Dilution
Result (S)



























C



























%
Difference



























Q



























M



























Comments:
                              FORM X
               - LCIN
                              10/91
                                     11

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                          STANDARD ADDITION RESULTS
Lab Name:
Lab Code:
Case No.:
Contract:
    SAS No.
                   SDG No.
                          Concentration Units: ug/L
EPA
Sanple
No.

































An

































Zero
Found

































A D 1
First
Added

































Found

































3 I T I O N S
Second
Added

































Found

































Third
Added

































Found

































Final
Cone.

































r

































Q








-


-

—




—

—


—
-
M

































                                 FORM  XI
- LCIN
                                                                        10/91
                                     12

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
                                   *•
                                     IDL
 Lab Name:

 Lab Code:
Case No.:
 Instrument ID Number:
Contract: _

    SAS NO.

    Method:
SDG No.:

Date:
                           Concentration Units: ug/L
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony_
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Cyanide
Fluoride
N02/NO3-N

Wavelength
or
Mass
Number
(WOMN)



























Wave-
Length
(nm)



























Mass
(m/z)



























Integ.
Time
(sec)



























Back-
ground



























CRDL
100
5
2
20
1
1
500
10
10
10
100
2
500
10
0.2
20
750
3
10
500
10
10
20
10
200
100

IDL



























Comments:
                                FORM XII
                    -  LCIN
                                                                      10/91
                                     13

-------
                         LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS




                        lUTERELEMENT CORRECTION FACTORS
 Lab  Name:



 Lab  Code:
Case No.:
Instrument ID Number:
Contract: __



    SAS No.





    Method:
SOG No.
                                      Date:
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Nickel
Potassium
Selenium
Silver
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc

Wave-
Length
or
Mass
























Ini
























berelement <
























Correction J
























factors fc
























ar:
























Comments:
                               FORM XIII
                    - LCIN
                             10/91

-------
                    LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS
             ICP/MS TUNING AND RESPONSE FACTOR CRITERIA
Lab Name:
Lot Code:
Instrument ID Number:
Analysis Date:
Contract :
Case No. : SAS No. :
Run No. :
Analysis Times: (initial)

SD6 No.:
Method:
(Final)
                              Tuning
BJ/Z
7Li/59Co
59CO/59CO
115In/59CO
205T1/59CO

Ion
Abundance
Criteria
(0.20 - 1.00)
( 1.00 )
(0.75 - 2.00)
(0.50 - 1.20)

% Relative
Initial





Abundance
Final





                Response Factor  (counts per second)
m/2
7Li
59CO
llSIn
102RU
205T1

Response
Factor
Criteria
( > 2.000 )
( >20.000 )
( >10.000 )
( < 25 )
( > 1.000 )

RF100 (1)
Initial






Response
Final






(1)  Background (RFO)  for l02Ru
                          Mass Calibration
m/z
7Li
59Co
H5In
205T1

Acceptable
Mass Range
( 6.9160 - 7.1160)
( 58.8332 - 59.0332)
(114.8040 - 115.0040)
(204.8744 - 2O5.0744)

Observed Mass





                        FORM
- LCIN
                                                                10/91
                                 15

-------
   LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANICS



ICP/MS INTERNAL STANDARDS SUMMARY
Lab Name:
Lab Code:
Instrument
Start Date

EPA
Sample
No.



































ID Number:
•
•


Time


































Case Nc




—


































). :




Q

































C<
i



Internal
—

































sn1




. S
Q

































:ract :
SAS No. :
Run No. :


Standards
—






































%!
Q
































_

SDC
Me
End

I For:
—


































; »
itt
Da


Q


































ro.:
LOd:
ite:


—







































Q

































         FORM XV
- LCIN
10/91
                 16

-------
LOW CONCENTRATION INORGANIC



    ANALYSIS RUN LOG (A)  "
Lab Name:
Lab Code:
Instrument
Start Date

EPA
Sample
No.



































ID Number:
*

Prep.
Batch
Number


































Ca




Time


































se No. :




D/F







































A
L







































S
B







































A
S

































C





B
A

































ton





B
E

































iti
S
R



C
D

































•ac
AS
mi



C
A

































;t
t
h



C
R

































»
»
Jo.
to.



C
o


































•
•
•
*


A]
C
D






































na
F
E






































iy
p
B






































te
M
6






































S
M
N


































£

En


H
6


































IDG
Me
d


N
I


































; h
!th
Da


K


































Fo.
LOG
te


S
E


































•
1:
•


A
G







































N
A







































T
L







































V







































Z
N

































   FORM XVI
- LCIN
                                                  10/91
             17

-------
LOW CONCENTRATION  INORGANICS




    ANALYSIS RUN LOG  (B)
Lab Name:
Lab Code:
Instrument
start Date


ID Number:
Case
No.:
Contract:

SAS No.:
Run No. :
: Analyte:
Retention Time Window
EPA
Sample
Mo.

































Prep.
Batch
Number

































: Lower Limit:

Inl.
Vol.

































Fin.
Vol.


































Time

































t

D/F

































%R

































SDG No. :

Method:
End Da1
Jpper Limj
%RSD

































:e:
it:

Retention
Time




































      FORM XVII
- LCIN
                                                   10/91
              18

-------
SAMPLE LOG-IN SHEET
labNam*
Pan.  C
-------
                LOW COHCEmUIXXaM WATER JFOK INORGANIC AHALXTES
                           COMPLETE SDO FILE  (CSF)
 Lab Name;  	           City/State:

 Case No. 	  SDG  No. 	  SOG Noa.  to Follow:

 SAS Mo. 	  Contract  No.  	 SOW No. 	

 All documanta deliver ad in the  Complete  SDG File muat  be original documents
 where possible.   (Reference Exhibit B, Section II D and Section III V)
                                                  Pane Noa.     (Please Check:)
                                                 From    To      Lab  Region
 1.   Inventory Sheet (DC-2) (Do not number)                     	    	
 2.   Cover Page                                  	   	    	    	
 3.   Inorganic Analysis Data Sheet (Form I)      	   	    	    	
 4.   Initial £ Continuing Calibration            ^_^   	    	    	
     Verification  (Form II - LCIN)
 5.   CRDL Standards  (Form III - LCIN)          	    	    	    	
 6.   Linear Range Standarda  (Form IV-LCIN)     	    	    	    	
7.   Blanks  (Form V-LCIN) -                     	    	    	    	
8.   ICP &  ICP/MS Interference Check             	    	    	    	
     Sample  (Form VI-LCIN)
9.   Spike  Sample Recovery  (Form VII-LCIN)     	    	    	    	
 10.  Duplicates  (Form VIll-LCIN)                	    	    	    	
 11.  Lab Control Sample  (Form IX-LCIN)          	    	    	    	
 12.  Serial Dilution  (Form X-LCIN)              	    	    	    	
 13.  Standard Addition Results                  	    	    	    	
     (Form XI-LCIN)
 14.  Instrument Detection  Limits                	   	    	    	
     (Form XII-LCIN)
 15.  Interalement Correction Factor               	   	    	    	
     (Form  XIII-LCIN)
 16.  ICP/MS Tuning fi Response Factor              	   	    	    	
     Criteria  (Form XIV-LCIN)
 17.  ICP/MS Internal Standards Summary           	   	    	    	
     (Form  XV-LCIN)
 18.  Analysis Run Log (A)  (Form XVI-LCIN)        	   	    	    	
 19.  Analysis Run Log (B)  (Form XVII-LCIN)       	   	    	    	
 20.  Standard Solutions Sources                  	   	    	    	
     (Form XVIII-LCIN)
 21.  ICP Raw Data                                	   	
 22.  ICP/MS Raw Data                             	   	     	   	
 23.  HYICP Raw Data                              	   	     	   	
 24.  Furnace AA Raw Data                         	

                                  Form DC-2                               4/90

-------
 25.
 26.
 27.
 28.
 29.
 30.
 31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
                                                  Pace Nos.
                                                 From    To
                                                          (Please  Check:)
                                                            Lab   Region
Mercury Raw Data
Cyanide Raw Data
Fluoride Raw Data
Total Nitrogen Raw Data
Preparation Logs
Traffic Report
EPA Shipping/Receiving Documents
   Airbill  (No.  of  Shipments 	)
   Chain—of-Cu«tody  Records
   Sample Tags
   Sample Log-In .Sheet (Lab & DC1)
   SDG  Cover Sheet
Misc. Shipping/Receiving Records
(list all individual records)
   Telephone Logs
Internal Lab Sample Transfer Records £
Tracking Sheets  (describe or list)
Internal Original Sample Prep & Analysis Records
(describe or list)
   Prep Records 	           	
   Analysis Records 	         	
   Description 	          	
Other Records (describe or list)
   Telephone Communication Log
36.  Comments:
Completed by (CLP Lab):
          (Signature)

Audited by (EPA):
                                  (Print  Name  &  Title)
(Date)
          (Signature)                  (Print Name  & Title)          (Date)

                            Form DC-2  (continued)                        4/90

-------
                                   EXHIBIT C
                                    TABLES
                                                                         PAGE
TABLE I:       INORGANIC TARGET ANALYTE LISV  ''AL)   	  C'1

TABLE II:      INORGANIC TARGET ANALYTE LIST (TA^,) FOR ICP/MS ANALYSES    C-3

TABLE III:     ICV,  CCV,  CRDL, AND LCS STANDARD
               CONTROL LIMITS FOR INORGANIC ANALYSES   	  C-4

TABLE IV:      SPIKING LEVELS FOR MATRIX SPIKE  	  c'5

TABLE V:       INTERFERENCE CHECK SAMPLE COMPONENTS AND
               CONCENTRATIONS FOR ICP  AND ICP/MS  	  c'6

TABLE VI:      EXAMPLE OF ANALYTE CONCENTRATION  EQUIVALENTS («g/L)
               ARISING FROM INTERFERENCES AT THE 100 mg/L LEVEL
               FOR ICP/OES   	  c-7

TABLE VII:     TUNING  SOLUTION FOR ICP/MS  	  C-8

TABLE VIII:    TUNING,  RESPONSE FACTOR AND MASS  CALIBRATION
               CRITERIA FOR ICP/MS  	  C-9

TABLE IX:      MEMORY  TEST  SOLUTION FOR ICP/MS  	   C-10

TABLE Z:       INTERNAL STANDARDS THAT MAY BE USED IN ICP/MS   	   C-ll

TABLE XI:      RECOMMENDED  ELEMENTAL EXPRESSIONS FOR ISOBARIC
               INTERFERENCES FOR ICP/MS   	   C-12

TABLE XII:     CONTRIBUTIONS OF CONCOMITANT ELEMENTS TO NEARBY
               ANALYTES FOR ICP/MS WHEN RESOLUTION AIH) MEASUREMENT
               SCHEMES VARY   	   C'13

TABLE XIII:    ISOBARIC MOLECULAR-ION INTERFERENCES THAT COULD AFFECT
               THE ANALYTES   	   C-14

TABLE XIV:     MASS  CHOICES FOR ELEMENTS WHICH MUST BE MONITORED
               EITHER DURING THE ANALYTICAL RUN OR IN A  SEPARATE
               SCAN  FOR ICP/MS   	   C-16
                                                                         10/91

-------
                                   TABLE I
                     INORGANIC TARGET ANALYTE LIST (TAL)
                                               Contract  Required
                                                Detection Linit
                                                      (1.2)
Analyte	(ug/L)

Aluminum                                                 100
Antimony                                                  5
Arsenic                                                   2
Bariua                                                   20
Beryllium                                                 1
Cadniun                                                   1
Calciua                                                500
Chromium                                                 10
Cobalt                                                   10
Copper                                                   10
Iron                                                   100
Lead                .                                      2
MagnesiuB                                             500
Manganese                                                10
Mercury                                                0.2
Nickel                                                   20
Potassium                                              750
Selenium                                                  3
Silver                                                   10
Sodium                                                 500
Thallium                                                 10
Vanadium                                                 10
Zinc                                                     20
Cyanide                                                  10
Fluoride                                               200
N02/NO3-N                                              100
(1)  Any analytical method specified in Exhibit D may be utilized-,  except
for the ICP/MS method (see Table II) and the 1C method  for  Fluoride,
provided the documented instrument detection limits meet the Contract
Required Detection Limit (CRDL) requirements.  Higher detection limits may
only be used in the following circumstance:
                                     C-l                                  10/91

-------
 If Che  sample concentration exceeds  five tines  the detection limit  of the
 instrument  or method  in  use,  the value nay be reported even  though  the
 instrument  detection  limit  may not equal the Contract Required Detection
 Limit.  This  is  illustrated in the example below:

 For lead:

                 Method  in  use - 1CP
                 Instrument Detection Limit (IDL) - 40
                 Sample  concentration - 220
                 Contract Required Detection Limit (CRDL) -  2

                 The value of 220 may be reported even though instrument
                 detection limit is greater than CRDL.  The instrument
                 detection limit must be documented as  described in Exhibit
                 E.

 (2)  The CRDL is the instrument detection limits obtained in pure water that
must be met using the. procedure in Exhibit E.   The detection limits for
samples may ue considerably higher depending on the sample matrix.
                                    C-2                                 10/91

-------
                                   TABLE II
                      INORGANIC  TARGET ANALYTE  LIST  (TAL)
                              FOR  ICP/MS ANALYSES
                                               Contract Required
                                                Detection Linit
                                                      (1,2)
Analyte	~	     (ug/L)

Aluminum                                              100
Antimony                                                5
Arsenic                                                 2
Barium                                                  20
Beryllium                                                1
Cadmium                                                 1
Chromium                                               10
Cobalt                                                  10
Copper                                                  10
Iron                                                   100
Lead                                                     2
Manganese                                               10
Nickel                                                  20
Selenium                                                 3
Silver                                                  10
Thallium                                                10
Vanadium                                                10
Zinc                                                    20
(1)  The ICP/MS method specified in Exhibit D may be utilized provided the
documented instrument detection limits meet the Contract Required Detection
Limit (CRDL) requirements.

(2)  The CRDL is the instrument detection limits obtained in pure water that
must be met using the procedure in Exhibit E.  The detection limits for
samples may be considerably higher depending on the sample matrix.
                                    C-3                                 10/91

-------
                                  TABLE III
              INITIAL AND CONTINUING CALIBRATION VERIFICATION.
        CRDL STANDARD CONTROL LIMITS, AND  LCS  STANDARD CONTROL LIMITS
                           FOR INORGANIC ANALYSES
INITIAL
Analytical Method
ICP/AA
ICP/MS
ICP/HYDRIDE.
Cold Vapor AA
Other
Other
Other
AND CONTINUING CALIBRATION
Inorganic Species
Metals
Metals
Metals
Mercury
Cyanide
Fluoride
NOo/NOvN
VERIFICATION LIMITS
% of True Value (EPA Set)
Low Limit
90
90
90
80
85
85
90
High Limit
110
110
110
120
115
115
110
                        CRDL STANDARD CONTROL LIMITS
                                              % of True Value  tEPA Set)
Analytical Method
ICP/OES and AA
ICP/MS
ICP/HYDRIDE
Cold Vapor AA
Other
Other
Other
Inorganic Species
Metals
Metals
Metals
Mercury
Cyanide
Fluoride
N02/NO3-N
Low Limit
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
High Limit
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
                         LCS STANDARD CONTROL LIMITS
The LCS Standard Control Limits are the same for all inorganic species.   The
limits are 80 - 120.
                                    C-4
10/91

-------
                                    TABLE IV
                       SPIKING LEVELS FOR MATRIX SPIKE(1)
                     Elemei\g                        Water (ug/L)

                     Aluminum                       509->>
                     Antimony                       50 &'
                     Arsenic                         10(3J
                     »/.«.-: m                          200
                     Bc*y; r\iuin                       10
                     Cadmivjua                         10
                     Calcium                         *
                    ChroaiuB                        SO
                    Cobalt                          100
                    Copper                          50
                    Iron                            250
                    Lead                            25
                    Magnesium                       *
                    Manganese                       50
                    Nickel                          100
                    Potassiun                       *
                    Selenium                        5
                    Silver                          50
                    Sodium                          *
                    Thallium                        50
                    Vanadium                        100
                    Zinc                            100
                    Mercury                          0.5
                    Cyanide                          100
                    Fluoride                        400
                                                    200
(1)  The levels shown  indicate  concentrations added in the final digestate
of the spiked sample.

(2)  The spike must  be made with a solution containing antimony in the +5
oxidation state.

(3)  The spike must  be made with a solution containing arsenic in the +5
oxidation state.

(4)  The spike must  be made with a solution containing selenium in the +6
oxidation state.

 *No spike required.
                                     C-5                                 10/91

-------
                                   TABU V
           INTERFERENCE CHECK SAMPLE COMPONENTS AND CONCENTRATIONS
                              FOR  ICP AND  ICP/MS
Interference              Solution A                    Solution AB
  Component           Concentration (my/D           Concentration fmy/L)

     Al                       100.0                           100.0
     Ca                       100.0                           100.0
     Fe                       100.0                           100.0
     Mg                       100.0                           100.0
     Na                       100.0                           100.0
     P                        100.0                           100.0
     K                        100.0                           100.0
     S                        100.0                           100.0
     C                        200.0                           200.0
     Cl                       720.0                           720.0
     Mo                        10.0                            10.0
     Ti                        10.0                            10.0
     As                        0.0                             0.100
     Cd                        0.0                             0.050
     Cr                        0.0                             0.100
     Co                        0.0                             0.200
     Cu                        0.0                             0.100
     Mn                        0.0                             0.100
     Ni                        0.0                             0.200
     Se                        0.0                             0.100
     Ag                        0.0                             0.100
     V                         0.0                             0.200
     Zn                        0.0                             0.100

NOTE: See Exhibit D, Part E,  for additional information.
                                     C-6                                 10/91

-------
                         TABLE VI
    EXAMPLE OF ANALYTE CONCENTRATION EQUIVALENTS (mg/L)
ARISING FROM INTERFERENTS AT THE 100 mg/L LEVEL FOR 1CP/OES
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Boron
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt
Copper
Iron
Lead
Magnesium
Manganese
Molybdenum
Nickel
Selenium
Silicon
Sodium
Thallium
Vanadium
Zinc
Wavelength
(nm)
308.215
206.833
193.696
455.403
313.042
249.773
226,502
317.933
267.716
228.616
324.754
259.940
220.353
279.079
257.610
202.030
231.604
196.026
288.158
588.995
190.864
292.402
213.856
Al
0.47
1.3
0.04
--
--
--
--
--
--
0.17
•
0.005
0.05

0.23
--
--
0.30
--
"
Interferent
Ca Cr Cu Fe Mg
2.9
0.44
..
0.08 --
..
0.03 --
-.
..
..
0.02 0.11
0.01
--

.-
0.07
..
..
0.05
0.14
0.08
0.32
0.03
0.01 0.01
0.003 --
0.005
0.003 --
..
A
0.13
0.002 0.002
0.03
. * * *
0.09

- -
- - _ .
0.005
" " * -
Mn Ni
0.21
0.02
0.04
0.04
0.03
..
0.12
. _
0.25
- -
-.
• • . _
- - - -
- -
- .
• — • «
- - - -
0.29
';li
.25
0.04

0.03
..
0.15
0.05
, .
. .
0.07


_ _


0.08
..
0.02

V
'..4
v .45
1. '
0.05

0.03
0.04

0.02


0.12

- -
— —
w m
0.01

..


                         C-7
                                                            10/91

-------
                    TABLE VII
            TUNING  SOLUTION  FOR  ICP/MS
The tuning solution oust consist of the following
      elements at the stated concentrations.
                           Concentration
               Element
               7Li               100
               Co                100
               In                100
               Tl                100
                    C-8                                 10/91

-------
                     TABLE VIII
TUNING. RESPONSE FACTOR AND MASS CALIBRATION CRITERIA
                     FOR ICP/MS
                   TUNING  CRITERIA

    n/2                Ion Abundance Criteria

    7Li/59Co               (  0.20  -  1.00 )
   59Co/59Co               (    1.00       )
  115In/59Co               (  0.75  -  2.00 )
  205Tl/59Co               (  0.50  -  1.20 )
              RESPONSE FACTOR CRITERIA

                       Response Factor Criteria
   7L1                     ( >2.000  )
  59Co                     ( >20,000 >
 115 In                     ( >10,000 )
 102Ru                     ( <25 )
 205T1                     ( > 1,000 )
             HASS CALIBRATION CRITERIA
    n>/2                           Exact Kass

    7Li                     (    6.9160 - 7.1160   )
  59Co                     (   58.8332 - 59.0332  )
 H5In                     (  114.8040 - 115.0040 )
 205T1                     (  204.8744 - 205.0744 )
                       C-9                                 10/91

-------
                                   TABLE  ix
                        MEMORY TEST SOLUTION FOR ICP/MS
         The memory solution must consist of the following elements:
                               Element           Concentration, (mg/L)

                                  Al                        100
                                  Ca                        100
                                  Fe                        100
                                  Kg                        100
                                  Na                        100
                                  K                         100
                                  C                         200
                                  Cl                        720   .
                                  Mo                         10
                                  P                         100
                                  S                         100
                                  Ti                         10
                                  Sb                         10
                                  As                         10
                                  Ba                         10
                                  Be                         10
                                  Cd                         10
                                  Cr                         10
                                  Co                         10
                                  Cu                         10
                                  Pb                         10
                                  Mn                         10
                                  Hi        .                 10
                                  Se                         10
                                  Ag                         10
                                  T                          10
                                  V                          10
                                  Zn                         10

*Note: See Exhibit D Part E and Exhibit E for further references  to the
   sry test solution.
                                    C-10                                10/91

-------
                   TABLE X
INTERNAL STANDARDS THAT MAY BE USED IN ICP/MS
                  Internal
                  Standard

                    Sc
                    Y
                    Rh
                    In
                    Tb
                    Ho

                    
-------
                          TABLE XI
RECOMMENDED ELEMENTAL EXPRESSIONS FOR ISOBARIC INTERFERENCES
                         FOR ICP/MS
Element
Al
Sb
As
Ba
Be
Cd
Ca
Cr
Co
Cu
Fe
Pb
Mg
Mn
Ni
Ag
Tl
V
Zn
6U
Sc
Y
Rh
In
Tb
Ho
Bi
Se
-
Isobaric
Correction
none
none
ArCl, Se
none
none
MoO, Sn
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
CIO, Cr
none
Li (natural)
none
none
none
Sn
none
none
none
Ar2
M - the total
Expression Proportional to Elemental
(1.0000)(27M)
(1.0000)(121M)
(1. 0000) (75M)- (3. 1278) (77M)+(1. 0177) (
(1.0000)(135M)
(1.0000)(9M)
Concentration


78M)


(1. 0000) (114M)-(0. 0268) (118M)-(1. 6285) (108M)
(1.0000)(4AM)
(1.0000)(52M)
(1.0000)(59M)
(1.0000)(65M)
(1.0000)(57M)





(1. 0000) (208M)-K1. 0000) (207M)+(1. 0000) (206M)
(1.0000)(25M)
(1.0000)(55M)
(1.0000)(60M)
(1.0000)(107M)
(1.0000)(205M)
(1 . 0000) (51H) - (3 . 1081) (53M)+(0 . 3524) (
(1.0000)(66M)
(1. 0000) (6M)-(0. 0813) (7M)
(1.0000)(45M)
(1.0000)<89M)
(1.0000)(103M)
(1.0000)(115M)-(0.0149)(118M)
(1.0000)(159M)
(1.0000)(165M)
(1.0000)(209M)
(1. 0000) (78M)-(0. 1869) (76M)
ion count rate at the specified mass.





52M)











                           C-12
10/91

-------
                                   TABLE XII
      CONTRIBUTIONS OF  CONCOMITANT ELEMENTS TO NEARBY ANALYTES FOR ICP/KS
                  WHEN RESOLUTION AND  MEASUREMENT SCHEMES VARY
           Concentrations listed are the approxinate level (mg/L) of
          interferenc that gives an analyte concentration of 10 ug/L.
                                 Peak Width at 10% of the Peak Height
Analte
121
   Sb
75
  *
U4,
   Cd
52
53
59
«
es;
  Cr
  Cr
  Co

  Cu
  Cu
55
58
  Mn
66
  Zn
           Interferent
           Element
          120
             Sn
           >• 7's'
          115
             In
51V
54Fe
*!Ni. -°Ni
"Ni,
64Zn
!*N
         59,
54Fe,
'ft..
           63
             Cu
                 108
                 108
                    Pd
          ^cd!    -

           65Cu, 63Cu
           65Cu

1 0 amu
Integration Width
0,9
820
77
910
1,200
1,700
>5,000
30
1.4
650
>1,500
190
4,000
1
>4,400
140
900
>3,000
9
>8 . 500
>2,400
130
1,800
1,600
>2 , 100
>7,800
2
anu 0.3 anu
5
none
4
12
8
150
none
1.5
7
6
1
14
1
22
14
8
96
4
690
22
3
12
10
45
57
none
0.8
ami
Integration Width
0.9 anu
10
1
3
9
10
180
5
none
1
2
none
9
none
15
57
4
75
10
4,500
80
5
36
37
410
410
3
0.3 amu
1
none
none
1
none
18
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
7
5
16
4
2
3
3
1
2
2
                                   C-13
                                                                       10/91

-------
                                 TABLE XIII
               ISOBARIC MOLECULAR-ION INTERFERENCES THAT COULD
                            AFFECT THE ANALYTES
          Oxygen   Hydroxyl
Analvte   Inter.   Inter.
                           Nitrogen   Chlorine   Sulfur   Carbon
                           Inter.     Inter.     Insej^.   Inter.   Other
l«sb
75Sb

^•3<*Ba
Ba
^•3^Ba
Ba
134^
*• 2Ba
Ba
&
•Li Cd
H2Cd
*^cd
*^Cd
Cd
^•^Cd
^fcd
108Cd
"Cr
«cr
Cr
54Cr
fi?Co
63Cu
5U
PdO
AgO
CoO
SnO
SbO
SnO
SnO
.SnO
SnO,
CdO

MoO
MoO,
MoO
MoO,
MoO
MoO
ZrO
MoO.
ArO
CIO
SO

CaO
TiO,
TiO


NiOH
SbOH
SnOH
SnOH
SnOH
SnOH
CdO InOH
CdOH

MoOH
ZrO MoOH
MoOH
ZrO
MoOH


ZrO ZrOH
C10H
ArOH

C10H
CaOH
P02 TiOH
TiOH
AgN
AgN
NiN




SnN
SnN
SnN, CdN

MoN
MoN
MoN
MoN, ZrN


MoN, ZrN
MoN, ZrN

KN
ArN
ArN, CaN
ScN
TiN
VN

SrCl
ArCl

MoCl

MoCl
MoCl
MoCl
MoCl

SeCl
SeCl, AsCl
GeCl
GeCl, AsCl
SeCl, AsCl


GeCl

NCI. OC1


MgCl
SiCl. MgCl
SiCl

ZrS
CaS





MoS
MoS

SeS
SeS

SeS


GeS
SeS,


SO

A1S
PS
SS, :
AgC
CdC
CuC


SnC

SnC
SnC
SnC


MoC

MoC


MoC. ZrC
GeS MoC. ZrC
ArC
KC
ArC
CaC
TiC
VC
S02H CrC
206Fb
2°7pK
»4»
SS
SS
%?
60.
62
'Ni
Ni
                                                                     MO
                                                                     ArNa
         KO
         WO
         WO
         WO

         WO
CaO

CaO
TiO
                   ArOH

                   WOH
                   WOH
                   WOH
                   TaOH
KOH

CaOH
ScOH
KN

WN


WN

UN
CaN

TiN
TiN
                                                    NaS
                                         NaCl
                                                  MgS
                                         MgCl. NaCl  SiS
                                         AlCl. MgCl  SiS
                                                  CaC
WC

WC
TiC

TiC
TiC. CrC
                                                                      Sn"
                                  C-14
                                                                   10/91

-------
Analvte

61»«
 78
 82
 76
 77
 74
  Se
  Se
  Se
  Se
  Se
lol
109
205
   'Tl
68
70
  Zn
Oxygen
Inter.

 ScO
 TiO
 ZnO
 NiO
 ZnO
 NiO
 NiO
 NiO
 ZrO
           CIO
           SO
           TiO
           TiO
           CrO
           VO
           FeO
Hydroxyl
Inter.

 CaOH
 TiOH
 CuOH
 NiOH
 CuOH
 CoOH
 NiOH
 FeOH
 ZrOH
 MoOH

 WOH
 SOH

 TiOH
 TiOH
 VOH
 TiOH, Cr
 CrOH
                              TABLE XIII (conc'd)
                               Nitrogen   Chlorine   Sulfur   Carbon
                               Inter.      Inter.      Inter.    Inter.   Other,
TIN
TIN, CrN
ZnN
ZnN
ZnN
NiN
CuN
NiN

MoN
                     C1N
                     ArN
                     TiN,  CrN
                     CrN
                     FeN
                     CrN
                     GeN
MgCl
SiCl, A1C1
ScCl, CaCl
CaCl. KC1
TiCl, ScCl
KC1
CaCl, ArCl
C1C1, KC1
GeCl
GeCl
SiS
SS
TiS
TiS
TiC
CrC
ZnC
ZnC
                                                                         Sn-
TiS, CrS
CaS      ZnC
ScS      CuC
CaS      NiC
AsS      MoC
SeS      MoC
           CIO, C1N    FS

           SiCl, A1C1  SS
           PCI, SiCl   SS
           PCI         ArS
           SCI         CIS
           C1C1        ArS
                     KC
                     ArC
                     CrC
                     FeC
                     FeC
                     MnC
                     NiC
                                                                         Mo-
                                                                         Ba-
                                                                         Ba"
Note:  The information provided in this table does not indicate that  all of
the described interferences need to be tested.  However, the table can be
consulted for informational purposes if unusual samples are encountered.
                                    C-15
                                                                        10/91

-------
                                   TABLE XIV
               MASS CHOICES FOR ELEMENTS THAT MUST BE MONITORED
       EITHER DURING THE ANALYTICAL RUN OR IN A SEPARATE SCAN FOR ICP/MS


            Boldface and underlined masses indicate  Che Basses that
         should have the most impact on data quality and the elemental
                equations used to collect the data.   Underlined
                           masses  nost  be monitored.


                                                Element of  interest

22      •                                              Aluminum
121. 123                                              Antimony
21        .                                           Arsenic
138, 137,  136, 135.  134, 132. 130                     Barium
£                                                     Beryllium
114. 112,  111, 110.  113. 116. 106, 108                 Cadmium
42,  43, 44,  46,  48                                    Calcium
52,52,10,54                                           Chromium
£i                                                    Cobalt
i2,  $5_                                                Copper
Si.  1&. 12,  58                                        Iron
208. 207.  206. 204                                    Lead
24,  21, 2i                                            Magnesium
H                                                    Manganese
202, 200. 199, 201                                    Mercury
58,  60, 62, 6JL, 64                                    Nickel
3j9                                                    Potassium
80.  21, 82, 2i, 22.  74                                Selenium
107. 109                                              Silver
22                                                    Sodium
205. 203                                              Thallium
51,  SS.                                                Vanadium
64,  ii. 4S, 12, 70                                    Zinc
42                                                    Krypton
72                                                    Germanium
139                                                   Lanthanum
140                                                   Cerium
129                                                   Xenon
118                                                   Tin
105                                                   Palladium
47, 49                                                Titanium
125                                                   Tellurium
69                                                    Gallium
35, 37                                                 Chlorine
98. 96,  92,  91, 94                                     Molybdenum

NOTE:   Although the only masses  that must be monitored are  underlined, it  is
strongly recommended that the other elements be monitored to indicate other
potential molecular interferences that could affect the data quality.
                                    C-16                                10/91

-------
                              ANALYTICAL METHODS


                                                                         PAGE

SECTION I   - INTRODUCTION   	   °-2

SECTION II  - SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES   	   0-3

      PART A - PRESERVATION OF WATER SAMPLES  	   D-3

      PART B - HOLDING TIMES FOR WATER SAMPLES  	   D-3

SECTIOH III - SAMPLE PREPARATION   	   D-4

SECTION IV  - SAMPLE ANALYSIS   	   D-12

      PART A - REAGENTS AND STANDARDS FOR METAL ANALYSIS
               AND SAMPLE PREPARATION   	   D-12

      PART B - INDUCTIVELY COUPLED PLASMA-ATOMIC
               EMISSION SPECTROMETRIC METHOD   	   D-16

      PART C - HYDRIDE GENERATION- ICP-ATOMIC EMISSION
               SPECTROMETRIC METHOD 	   D-23

      PART D - GRAPHITE FURNACE AND FLAME ATOMIC ABSORPSION METHODS  ..  D-29

      PART E - INDUCTIVELY COUPLED PLASMA-MASS SPECTROMETRY   	   D-36

      PART F - METHOD FOR MERCURY ANALYSIS IN WATER	   D-46

      PART G - METHOD FOR TOTAL CYANIDE ANALYSIS IN WATER  	   D-53

      PART H - ION CHROMATOGRAPHY METHODS FOR N02/N03-N  	D-60

      PART I - AUTOMATED COLORIMETRIC METHODS FOR
               THE DETERMINATION OF NO2/N03-N 	  D-64

      PART J - ION SELECTIVE ELECTRODE METHOD FOR
               THE DETERMINATION OF FLUORIDE    	   D-68
                                    D-l                                 10/91

-------
                                   SECTION I
                                 INTRODUCTION


The analytical method specified in Exhibit 0 nay be utilized as long as  Che
documented  instrument or method detection limits meet the Contract Required
Detection Limits (Exhibit C, Tables I and II).  Analytical methods with
higher detection limits may be used only if the sample concentration exceeds
five times  the documented detection limit of the instrument or method.

The sample  for dissolved metal analysis will be filtered through a 0.450
membrane filter and preserved in the field before the samples are shipped to
the laboratory.  All instrument calibration standards must be matrix matched
to the samples for dissolved metals.  Matrix MtthlM BUS^ be applied without
affeecing che original sample '"?lVBf by more than ten percent.

All samples must initially be run undiluted (i.e.,  original sample or final
product of  sample preparation procedure).   When an analyte concentration
exceeds the calibrated or linear range,  re-analysis for that analyte(s)  is
required after appropriate dilution.  The Contractor must use the lowest
dilution factor necessary to bring each analyte within the valid analytical
range (but not below the CRDL) and report the highest valid value for each
analyte.  Unless the Contractor can submit proof that dilution was required
to attain valid results, both diluted and undiluted sample measurements must
be contained in the raw data.

Labware must be acid cleaned according to EPA's manual "Methods for Chemical
Analysis of Water and Wastes" or an equivalent procedure.   Samples must be
opened and digested in a hood.  Stock solutions for standards may be
purchased or made up as specified in Part A of Exhibit D.   All sample
dilutions shall be made with deionized water acidified to maintain constant
acid strength.

Before water sample preparation is initiated, the Contractor must check  the
pH of all water samples, and note the pH in the sample preparation log.

Unless otherwise instructed by SHO, all samples must be mixed thoroughly
prior to aliquoting for analysis or digestion.

Background  corrections are required for all furnace AA measurements.  Each
furnace analysis requires at least two burns, except for full Method of
Standard Additions (MSA) .

All ICP, ICP-Hydride, and ICP/MS measurements shall require a minimum of two
complete replicate exposures.  Exposures for all samples and quality
assurance measurements must be reported in the raw data in concentration
units; intensities are not acceptable.  The average of the exposures must be
used for standardization, sample analysis, and in the reporting as  specified
in Exhibit  B.
                                    D-2                                 10/91

-------
                                   SECTION II
                     SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

 A.    PRESERVATION  OP WATER SAMPLES

       Measurement
        Parameter      Container(l>     Preservative(2)

       Metals(3)            P,G          HNO3 to pH <2

       Cyanide,  total      P,G          0.6g ascorbic  acid(4)
       and amenable                     NaOH to pH >12
       to  chlorination                   Cool, maintain  at
                                        4*C(±2'C)
                                        until analysis

       N02/N03-N           P.G           H2S04 to pH <2

       Fluoride            P,G           Cool, maintain  at 4*C(± 2'C)

FOOTNOTES:

     (1)  Polyethylene  (P)  or  glass (G).

     (2)  Sample  preservation  is performed  by the  sampler  immediately upon
          sample  collection.

     (3)  Samples are filtered immediately  on-site by  the  sampler before
          adding  preservative  for  dissolved metals.

     (4)  Only used in  the  presence of  residual chlorine.

B.    HOLDING TIMES  FOR  WATER SAMPLES

     Following are  the  maximum sample holding times allowable  under this
     contract. To  be compliant with this  contract, the Contractor must
     analyze samples within these  times even if these  times  are  less than the
     maximum data submission times allowed in this contract.

                            No. of Days Following
                              Sample Receipt
     Analvte                   bv  Contractor

     Mercury                        26  days
     Metals (other  than mercury)    180  days
     Cyanide                        12  days
     N02/N03-N                      12  days
     Fluoride                       26  days

     The Contractor must verify that the samples have  been preserved properly
     using wide range pH paper.   If the results of such verification do not
     conform to  the requirements  stated in A for preservation  or in B for
     holding time,  the  Contractor  must  contact  SMO for instructions before
     proceeding any further.
                                   D-3                                 10/91

-------
                                  SECTION  III
                              SAMPLE PREPARATION


Before collecting samples, a decision must be made by the data user as to  the
type of data desired, i.e., dissolved or total constituent analysis.  This
information will be included on the traffic report and the following
preparation techniques shall be used for analysis under this contract.

All samples and standards (including QA/QC standards) must be matrix matched
before analysis.  Matrix matching must be applied without affecting the
original sample vrtl|iiffc bv more than ten percent.

1.    DISSOLVED METAT.S PATER SAMPLE PREPARATION

      For the determination of dissolved constituents the sample must be
      filtered through a 0.45 u membrane filter and preserved in the field.
      This will be performed by the sampling team and recorded on the traffic
      report form.  Analysis performed on a sample so treated shall be
      reported as "dissolved* concentrations.

2.    TOTAT, *ET*T-«t WATER SAHPLJ PREPARATION USING HOT PLATE DIGESTION

2.1   ACID DIGESTION PROCEDURE FOR FURNACE ATOMIC ABSORPTION ANALYSIS

      Shake sample and transfer 100 mL of well-mixed sample to a 250-mL
      beaker,  add 1 mL of (1+1) HNO3 and 2 mL 30% ^2 Co the sample.  Cover
      with watch glass or similar cover and heat on a steam bath or hoc plate
      for 2 hours at 95*C or until sample  volume  is reduced to between 25  and
      50 mL, making certain sample does not boil.  Cool sample and filter  Co
      remove insoluble material.   (NOTE:   In place of filtering, the sample,
      after dilution and mixing,  may be centrifuged or allowed to setcle by
      gravity overnight to remove insoluble material.)  Adjust sample volume
      to 100 mL with deionized distilled water.   The sample is now ready for
      analysis.

      Concentrations so determined shall be reported as "total".

      If Sb is to be determined by furnace AA, use the digestate prepared  for
      ICP/flame AA analysis.

2.2   ACID DIGESTION PROCEDURE FOR ICP, HYICF AND FLAME AA ANALYSES

      Shake sample and transfer 100 mL of veil-mixed sample to a 250-mL
      beaker,  add 2 mL of (1+1) HN03 and 10 mL of (1+1) HC1 Co the sample.
      Cover with watch glass or similar cover and heat on a steam bath or  hot
      place for 2 hours at 95*C or until sample volume is reduced to between
      25 and 50 mL, making certain sample does not boil.  Cool  sample and
      filter to remove insoluble material.  (NOTE:  In place  of filCering,
      the sample, after dilution and mixing, may be centrifuged or  allowed to
      settle by gravity overnight to remove insoluble material.)  Adjust
      sample volume to 100 mL with deionized distilled water.   The  sample is
      now ready for analysis.
                                    D-4                                  10/91

-------
       Concentrations  so  determined shall be reported as "total*.

 2.3.   ACID DIGESTION  PROCEDURE FOR ICP/MS ANALYSIS

       Shake the sample and transfer 100  mL of well-mixed sample to a 250 mL
       beaker,  add 1.0 mL of (1+1)  HN03 and 2 mL of 30% H202  to the saaple.
       Cover with a watch glass or  similar cover and heat on  a steam bath or
       hot plate for 2 hours at 95*C (temperature should be monitored with a
       thernameter) or until sample volume is reduced to between 25 and 50 mL,
       making certain  that the sample does not boil.   Cool the sample and
       filter  » I., ernove insoluble material.   Adjust the sample volume to 100
       mL with  «aJV. Typ . I water.   The sample is now ready for analysis.

       The  sample  preparation procedure for  ICP-AES must be used for
       quantitation if this  digestate  contains  more than 30 ug/L of silver,  or
       more.than 100 ug/L  of antimony.

       Concentrations  so determined shall be  reported as "total".

3.    TOTAL METAT-g WATER SAMP*-* PREPARATION PS IRC MICROWAVE DIGESTION

3.1   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

      This method is an acid digestion procedure using microwave energy to
      prepare water samples for analysis by GFAA, ICP, and/or ICP/MS for the
      following metals:

                         Aluminum     Chromium    Potassium*
                         Antimony     Cobalt       Selenium
                         Arsenic      Copper       Silver
                         Barium       Iron         Sodium*
                         Beryllium    Lead         Thallium
                         Cadmium      Magnesium*   Vanadium
                         Calcium*     Manganese    Zinc
                                      Nickel

*NOTE:All elements except for calcium, magnesium, potassium,             and
      sodium may be analyzed by ICP/MS.

3.2   SUMMARY OF METHOD

      3.2.1    A representative 45  mL water sample is digested in nitric acid.
               The digestate is then filtered to remove insoluble  material.
               (NOTE:  In  place of filtering,  the sample may be centrifuged or
               allowed to settle by gravity overnight to remove insoluble
               material).   If filtering is required,  the sample is processed
               without volume correction  since the final volume is identical
               to  the  initial volume in closed vessel digestions.
                                    D-5                                10/91

-------
3.3   APPARATUS AND MATERIALS (MICROWAVE)

      3.3.1    Cornercial kitchen or home-use microwave ovens shall not be
               used for the digestion of samples under this contract.  The
               oven cavity must be corrosion resistant and well ventilated.
               All electronics must be protected against corrosion for safe
               operation.

      3.3.2    Microwave oven with programmable power settings up to at least
               600 watts.

      3.3.3    The system must use PFA TeflonR digestion vessels (60 to 120 mL
               capacity) capable of withstanding pressures of up to 100 psi.
               Pressure venting vessels capable of controlled pressure relief
               at pressures exceeding 100 psi.

      3.3.A   A double ported TeflonR PFA overflow vessel (60 or 120 mL
              capacity).

      3.3.5   A rotating table must be used to ensure homogeneous
              distribution of microwave radiation within the oven.

3.4   MICROWAVE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

      3.4.1   The calibration procedure is a critical step prior to the use
              of any microwave unit.   In order that absolute power settings
              may be interchanged from one microwave unit to another, the
              actual delivered power must be determined.

               Calibration of a laboratory microwave unit depends on the type
               of electronic system used by the manufacturer.  If the unit has
               a precise and accurate linear relationship between the output
              power and the scale used in controlling the microwave unit,
               then the calibration can be a single-point calibration at
              maximum power.   If the unit is not accurate or precise for some
              portion of the controlling scale, then a multiple point
               calibration is necessary.  If the unit power calibration needs
              multiple point calibration, then the point where linearity
              begins must be identified.  For example:  a calibracion at 100,
               99, 98, 97, 95, 90, 80, 70, 60, and 50% power settings can be
               applied and the data plotted.  The nonlinear portion of the
               calibration curve can be excluded or restricted in use.  Each
               percent is equivalent to approximately 5.5  - 6.5 W and becomes
               che smallest unit of power that can be controlled.  If 20  -  40
               U are contained from 99-100%, that portion  of  che microwave
               calibration is not controllable by 3-7 times  that of  che  linear
               portion of the control scale and will prevent  duplication of
               precise power conditions specified in that  portion  of Che power
               scale.

               The  following  equation evaluates che power  available  for
               heating  in a microwave cavity.  This  is  accomplished by
               measuring the  temperature  rise  in 1 Kg  of water  exposed co
               electromagnetic  radiation for  a fixed period amount of time.

                                    D-6                                10/91

-------
         Measurements  are  made  on weighed  replicates (5  replicates)  of
         one  kilogram  samples of room  temperature  distilled water in
         thick-walled  microwave transparent  (Teflon*)  vessels.   The
         containers must be circulated continuously through the field
         for  at least  two  (2) minutes  at full power.  Th
-------
                    Cp - The heat capacity,  thenul capacity or  specific
                        heat,  (cal-g^-'C*1 - 1.0 for water).

                    M - The mass of the saaple in grams  (g).

                    T - Tf-Ti in -C.

                    t - Tine in seconds (s).

                    Derive an equation for the linear portion of the
                    calibration range and determine the equivalent value
                    in watts of the arbitrary setting scale.  Use the
                    actual power in watts to determine the appropriate
                    setting of the particular microwave unit being used.
                    Each microwave unit will have its own setting that
                    corresponds to the actual power delivered to the
                    samples.

3.4.3   Cleaning Procedure

        3.4.3.1    The  initial  cleaning of the FFA vessels*:

                   3.4.3.1.1    Prior to first use - New vessels must
                               be annealed  before they  are used.  A
                               pretreatment/cleaning procedure  must be
                               followed.  This procedure calls  for
                               heating the  vessels for  96 hours at
                               200*C.  The  vessels must be
                               disassembled during annealing and the
                               sealing surfaces (the top of the vessel
                               or its rim)  must not be  used to  support
                               the vessel during annealing.

                   3.4.3.1.2    Rinse in ASTH Type I water.

                   3.4.3.1.3    Immerse in 1:1 HC1 for a minimum of  3
                               hours after  the cleaning bath has
                               reached a temperature just below
                               boiling.

                   3.4.3.1.4    Rinse in ASTH Type I water.

                   3.4.3.1.5    Immerse in 1:1 HNC>3 for  a minimum of 3
                               hours after  the cleaning bath has
                               reached a temperature just below
                               boiling.

                   3.4.3.1.6    The vessels  are  then  rinsed with
                               copious amounts  of ASTM  Type I water
                               prior to use for any  analyses under
                               this  contract.

Note: All precautions must be  taken  to avoid preparation
        blank contamination.

                             D-8                                 10/91

-------
3.5   CLEANING PROCEDURE BETWEEN SAMPLE DIGESTIONS

      3.5.1   Wash entire vessel in hot water using laboratory-grade
              nonphosphcte detergent.

      3.5.2   Rinse wich 1:1 nitric acid.

      3.5.3   Rinse three times with ASTM Type I water.  If contaminants are
              found in the preparation blank, it is manadatory that steps
              3.4.3.1.2 through 3.4.3.1.6 be strictly adhered to.

3.6   DIGESTION  PROCEDURE FOR MICROWAVE

      3.6.1   45 mL of the sample are measured into TeflonR digestion vessels
              using volumetric glassware.  5 mL of high purity HNO3 are added
              to the digestion vessels and the weight recorded to 0.02 g.

      3.6.2   The caps with the pressure release valves are placed on the
              vessels hand tight and then tightened,  using constant torque,
              to 12 ft.-Ibs.   Place 5 sample vessels in the carousel,  evenly
              spaced around its  periphery in the microwave unit.  Venting
              tubes connect each sample  vessel with a collection vessel.
              Each sample vessel is attached to a clean, double-ported vessel
              to collect any sample expelled from the sample vessel in the
              event of over pressurization.   Assembly of the vessels into the
              coracle may be done inside or outside the microwave.   This
              procedure is energy balanced for five 45 mL water samples (each
              with 5 mL of acid) to produce consistent conditions and prevent
              alteration of the conditions.   The initial temperature of the
              samples should be 24 + 1*C.   Blanks must have 45 mL of
              deionized water and the same amount of acid to be added to the
              microwave as a reagent blank.

      3.6.3   Power Programming of Nitric Acid:

              The 5 samples of 45 mL water and 5 mL nitric acid are
              irradiated for 10 minutes  at 545 V and immediately cycled to
              the second program for  10 minutes at 344 W (BASED ON THE
              CALIBRATION OF THE MICROWAVE UNIT AS PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED).

              This program brings the samples to 160 + 4*C in 10 minutes and
              then causes a .slow rise in temperature between 165-170'C during
              the second 10 minutes.

      3.6.4   Following the 20 minute program, the samples are left to cool
              in the microwave unit for 5 minutes, with the exhaust fan ON.
              The samples and/or carousel may then be removed from the
              microwave unit.  Before opening the vessels, let cool until
              they are no longer hot to the touch.

      3.6.5   After the sample vessel has cooled, weigh the sample vessel  and
              compare to the initial weight as reported in the preparation
              log.  Any sample vessel exhibiting a < 0.5 g loss must have  any
              excess sample from the associated collection vessel added  to

                                   D-9                                 10/91

-------
               the original sample vessel before proceeding with the sanple
               preparation.  Any sample vessel exhibiting a > 0.5 g loss must
               be identified in the preparation log and the sample redigested.

       3.6.6   Sample Filtration:

               The digested samples are shaken well to mix in any condensate
               within the digestion vessel before being opened.   The digestate
               are then filtered into 50 mL glass volumetric flasks through
               ultra-clean filter paper and diluted to 50 mL (if necessary) .
               The samples are now ready for analysis.  The sample results
               must be corrected by a factor of 1.11 in order to report final
               concentration valves based on an initial volume of 45 mL.
               Concentrations so determined shall be reported as "total".

4.    PICgSTIOH PROCEDURE Pffl HKR?PRY ANALYSIS

      Because the digestion procedure for mercury is an integral part of the
      analysis system, it is discussed in Part F of the Sample Analysis
      Section (Section IV).

5.
5.1   Place 500 mL of sample, or an aliquot diluted to 500 mL,  in the 1 liter
      boiling flask.  Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide to the absorbing tube and
      dilute if necessary with ASTM Type I water to obtain an adequate depth
      of liquid in the absorber. Connect the boiling flask,  condenser,
      absorber and tap in the train.

5.2   Start a slow stream of air entering the boiling flask  by adjusting the
      vacuum source.  Adjust the vacuum so that approximately one bubble of
      air per second enters the boiling flask through the air inlet tube.

      NOTE:  The bubble rate will not remain constant after  the reagents have
      been added and while heat is being applied to the flask.  It will be
      necessary to readjust the air rate occasionally to prevent the solution
      in the boiling flask from backing up into the air inlet tube.

5.3   Slowly add 25 mL concentrated sulfuric acid through the air inlet tube.
      Rinse the tube with ASTM Type I water ana allow the airflow to mix the
      flask contents for 3 minutes.  Pour 20 mL of magnesium chloride
      solution into the air inlet and wash down with a stream of water.

5.4   Heat the solution to boiling, taking care to prevent the solution from
      backing up into and overflowing from the air inlet tube.  Reflux for
      one hour.  Turn off heat and continue the airflow for at least  15
      minutes.  After cooling the boiling flask, disconnect  the absorber and
      close off the vacuum source.

5.5   Drain the solution from the absorber into a 250 mL volumetric  flask  and
      bring up to volume with ASTM Type I water washings  from  the  absorber
      tube.
                                   D-10                                10/91

-------
5.6   The  samples  are  now  ready  for analysis.  The sample results mist be
      corrected  for by a factor  of 2  in order to report final concentration
      based on an  initial  volume of 500 ml.  If the initial volume  is  less
      than 500 mL, the sample must be diluted to 500 mL and an appropriate
      dilution factor  must be indicated.

6.    PREPARATION  PROCEDURE FOR  ION CHROMATOGRAPHT METHOD

      Filtration of the sample and reagents is required.  The saaple matrix
      should be matched with all blanks, standards, and quality control
      samples to avoid inaccuracies resulting from possible standard curve
      deviation.  The  preparation procedure for the Ion Chromatography  method
      is an integral part  of the analysis system and is discussed in full  in
      Part H of the Sample Analysis Section (Section IV) .

7.    P»*PABATIOH PROCEDURE FOR AUTOMATED COLORPffiTRI? METHODS

      Filtration of the sample and reagents is required.  The sample matrix
      should be matched with all blanks, standards, and quality control
      samples to avoid inaccuracies resulting from possible standard curve
      deviation.  The preparation procedure for using Automated Colorimetric
      Methods is an integral part of the analysis  system and is discussed  in
      full in Part I of the Sample Analysis Section (Section IV).
8.    PREPARATION PROCEDURE FOR TOM fiETrgCTTint gT^CTRODE METHOD

      A pH 5 buffer containing a strong chelating agent must be added to all
      samples to eliminate interferences caused by pH and complexes forming.
      The preparation procedure for using the Ion Selective Electrode method
      is an integral part of the analysis system and is discussed in full in
      Part J of the Sample Analysis Section (Section IV) .
                                   D-ll                                10/91

-------
                                                                Exhibit D Section IV
                                  SECTION IV
                                SAMPLE ANALYSIS
  PART A - REAGENTS AND STANDARDS FOR METALS ANALYSIS AND SAMPLE PREPARATION
1.    REAGENTS AND STANDARDS

1.1   Acids used in the preparation of standards ancti 
-------
                                                           Exhibit D Section IV


 Metal

                         weight  (mg)
 Concentration (rag/L)  -  —-	—-—
                         volume  (L)

 Metal salts

                         weight  (mg) x mole  fraction
Concentration  (mg/L)  -
                            volume  (L)
NOTE:  The recommended amounts of the starting materials specified  for
the  following stock solutions are dependent upon the stoichionetry  of
the  materials used as starting materials.  Actual assay values of the
starting materials should be used and the actual amounts corrected
accordingly.

1.3.1   Aluminum solution,  stock, 1 aL - 100 ug Al:  Dissolve  1.3903 g
        A1(NO3)3-9H20 in 10 mL ASTM Type I water with 10 mL.   HN03.
        Dilute  to 1,000 mL  with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.2   Antimony  solution,  stock, 1 mL - 100 ug Sb:  Dissolve  0.1197 g
        Sb2C>3 in  5 mL ASTM  Type I water containing 0.1233 g C^OgHg
        (tartaric acid), add SOO mL ASTM Type I water, add 1 aL cone.
        HN<>3 and  dilute to  1,000 mL with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.3   Arsenic solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug As:  Dissolve 0.1320 g
        of AS203  in 100 mL  of ASTM Type I water containing 0.45 g
        HH^OH.  Acidify the solution with 12 mL cone.  HN03 and dilute
        to 1,000  mL with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.4   Barium  solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug Ba:  Dissolve 0.1437  g
        BaCO3 in  10 mL ASTM Type I water with 10 mL cone. HNC>3.  After
        dissolution is complete, warm the solution to degas.   Dilute  to
        1,000 mL with ASTM  Type I water.

1.3.5   Beryllium solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug Be:  Do not dry.
        Dissolve  4.5086 g BeO(C2H302)g in ASTM Type I water, add 10.0
        mL cone.  HNO} and dilute to 1,000 mL with ASTM Type I  water.

1.3.6   Cadmium solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug Cd:  Dissolve 0.1142 g
        CdO in a  minimum amount of (1+1) HN03.  Heat to  increase  rate
        of dissolution.  Add 10.0 mL cone. HNO3 and dilute to  1,000 mL
        with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.7   Calcium  solution, stock, 1 mL -  100 ug Ca:   Suspend 0.2498 g
        CaCC>3 dried at 180  *C  for 1 h before weighing  in ASTM Type I
        water and dissolve  cautiously with a minimum amount  of (1+1)
        HN03-  After dissolution is complete,  warm the  solution to
        degas.  Add 10.0 mL cone. HNO3 and dilute  to 1,000 mL with ASTM
        Type I water.
                             D-13                                10/91

-------
                                                          Exhibit 0 Section  IV
                                                      «

 1.3.8    Chromium solution,  stock,  1 mL - 100 ug Cr:   Dissolve 0.2424  g
         of (NH4>2Cr207 in ASTM Type I water.   Reduce  the  chromium with
         a few drops of hydrazine (NH^W^),  exhibited  by the  color
         change of the solution from orange  to green.  When solution is
         complete,  acidify with 10  mL cone.  HNO3 and dilute to 1,000 mL
         with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.9    Cobalt solution, stock,  1  mL - 100  ug Co:  Dissolve  0.1000 g  of
         cobalt metal in a minimum  amount of (1+1) HN03.  Add 10.0 mL
         cone.  HN03 and dilute to 1,00 mL with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.10   Copper solution,  stock,  1  mL - 100  ug Cu:  Dissolve  0.1000 g  Cu
         in a minimum amount  of (1+1)  HN03.  Add 10.0  mL cone.  HN03 and
         dilute to  1,000 mL with  ASTM Type I water.

1.3.11   Iron solution,  stock,  1  mL - 100 ug Fe:  Dissolve 0.1000  g Fe
         in a minimum amount  of (1+1)  HN03.  Add 10.0  mL cone.  HH03 and
         dilute to  1,000 mL with  ASTM Type I wacer.

1.3.12   Lead solution,  stock,  1  mL -  100 ug Pb:  Dissolve 0.1599 g
         Pb(N03)2 in a minimum amount  of (1+1) HN03.  Add 10.0  mL of
         cone.  HN03  and  dilute to 1,000  mL with ASTM Type I wacer.

1.3.13   Magnesium  solution,  stock,  1  aL - 100 ug Mg:   Dissolve 0.1658  g
         MgO  in a minimum amount  of (1+1)  HN03.  Add 10.0 mL cone. HN03
         and  dilute  to 1,000  mL with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.14   Manganese  solution,  stock.  1  mL - 100 ug Mn:   Dissolve 0.3149  g
         of manganese acetate Mn  (€2^2)2 in ASTM Type 1 water.  Add
         10.0 mL of cone.  HN03  and  dilute to 1.000 mL with ASTM Type I
         water.

1.3.15   Mercury solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug  Hg:  Dissolve  0.1708 g
         mercury (II)  nitrate Hg(N03)2"(H20) in  75 oL  of ASTM Type I
         water.  Add 10  mL of cone.  HN03 and dilute to 1,000  mL with
         ASTM Type  I water.

1.3.16   Nickel  solution,  stock,  1  mL -  100  ug Ni:  Dissolve  0.1000 g  of
         nickel  metal  in 10 mL hoc  cone.'  HN03>  cool and dilute to 1,000
         mL with ASTM Type I  water.

1.3.17   Silver solution,  stock,  1  mL -  100  ug Ag:  Dissolve  0.1575 g
         AgN03  in 100 mL of ASTM  Type  1  water  and 10 mL cone.  HN03.
         Dilute to  1000 mL with ASTM Type 1  water.

1.3.18   Thallium  solution,  stock,  1 mL - 100  ug Tl:   Dissolve 0.1303  g
         T1N03 in ASTM Type  I water.  Add 10.0 mL cone. HN03  and dilute
         to 1,000  mL with ASTM Type I water.

1.3.19   Vanadium  solution,  stock,  1 mL - 100 ug V:  Dissolve 0.2296  g
         NH^V03 in a minimum amount of cone. HNO3.  Heat  to increase
         rate of dissolution.  Add 10.0 mL cone. HN03  and dilute to
         1,000 mL with ASTM  Type I  water.
                             D-14                                10/91

-------
                                                                 Exhibit D Section IV
                    V                                  "*

       1.3.20  Zinc solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug Zn:  Dissolve 0.1245 g  ZnO
               in a minimum amount of dilute HNO3-  Add 10.0 mL cone. HN(>3 and
               dilute to 1,000 mL with ASTM Type I water.

 1.4   In the determination of trace  elements,  containers can introduce either
       positive or negative errors  in the measurement  of trace elements by (a)
       contributing contaminants  through leaching  or surface desorption and
       (b) depleting concentrations through adsorption.   Thus the  collection
       and treatment of the samples prior to analysis  require particular
       attention.   The following  cleaning treatment sequence has been
       determined  to be  adequate  to minimize contamination in the  sample
       bottles,  whether  borosilicate  glass, linear polyethylene, or Teflon:
       detergent,  Type II water,  1+1  hydrochloric acid, ASTM Type  I water,  1+1
       nitric acid,  and  Type  I water.

Note:  Chromic acid mist not be used because chromium is  one of the contract
required analytes,  and  its use may lead to cross-contamination.

1.5    Three  types of blanks are required for the analysis.  The calibration
       blank  is used  in establishing  the calibration curve, the preparation
       blank  is used to monitor for possible contamination resulting from the
       sample preparation procedure, and the rinse blank is used to flush the
       system between-all samples  and standards.

       1.5.1    The calibration blank  must be matrix matched  to  the  standards.

       1.5.2    The preparation blank  must contain all the  reagents  in the  same
               volumes as used in processing the samples.  The  reagent blank
               must be carried through the complete procedure and contain  the
               same  acid concentration in the final solution  as the sample
               solutions used for analysis.

       1.5.3   The  rinse blank consists of the appropriate acid in  ASTM  Type I
              water.  Prepare a sufficient quantity to flush the system
              between standards and  samples.

1.6   The instrument check standard is  the  Initial and Continuing Calibration
      Verification solution (ICV  and CCV) which is prepared by the analyst by
      combining compatible elements at  concentrations equivalent to the
      midpoint of  their respective calibration ranges.  This solution must be
      prepared in  the same acid matrix  as  the calibration standards.

1.7   The Interference Check Solution(s)  (ICS) is prepared to contain known
      concentrations of interfering elements that will demonstrate  the
      magnitude of interferences  and provide an adequate  test of any
      corrections.  The ICS is used to  verify that the interference  levels
      are corrected by the data system  within quality control  limits.

       1.7.1    Stock solutions for preparing ICS A and AB may be provided  if
               available.   Otherwise, refer to  Exhibit C,  Table V.   They must
              be  diluted  tenfold  (1+9) before  use according to the
               instructions provided.  The final  ICS A and AB must  be prepared
              weekly.
                                   D-15                                10/91

-------
                                                            Exhibit D ICF-AES
                                    PART B
        IHDUCTIVELY COUPLED  PLASMA-ATOMIC EMISSION SPECTROMETRIC METHOD
1.    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

1.1   Table I,  in Exhibit C,  lists elements along with the Contract Required
      Detection Liait for the analysis of metals in low concentration waters.
      Actual working detected limits are saaple dependent and as the sample
      matrix varies, these concentrations may also vary.  Appropriate steps
      must be taken in all analyses to ensure that potential interferences
      are taken into account.

2.    SUMMARY OF METHOD

2.1   The method describes a technique for the simultaneous or sequential
      multielement determination of trace elements in solution.   The basis of
      the method is the measurement of atomic emission by an optical
      spectroscopic technique. Samples are nebulized and the aerosol that is
      produced is transported to the plasma torch where excitation occurs.
      Characteristic atomic-line emission spectra are produced by a radio-
      frequency inductively coupled plasma (ICP).   The spectra are dispersed
      by a grating spectrometer and the intensities of the line are monitored
      by photomultiplier tubes.   The photocurrents from the photomultiplier
      tubes are processed and controlled by a computer system.   A background
      correction technique is required to compensate for variable background
      contribution to the determination of trace elements.  Background must
      be measured adjacent to analyte lines on samples during analysis.  The
      position selected for the background intensity measurement, on either
      or both sides of the analytical line, will be determined by the
      complexity of the spectrum adjacent to the analyte line. The position
      used must be free of spectral interference and reflect the same change
      in background intensity as occurs at the analyte wavelength measured.
      Background correction is not required in cases of line broadening where
      a background correction measurement would actually degrade the
      analytical result.  The possibility of additional interferences named
      in 3 should also be recognized and appropriate corrections made.

3.

3.1   Several types of interference effects may contribute to inaccuracies  in
      the determination of trace elements.  They can be summarized as
      follows:

      3.1.1    Spectral interferences can be categorized as

               3.1.1.1    Overlap  of a spectral line from another element;

               3.1.1.2    Unresolved overlap of molecular band spectra;

               3.1.1.3    Background contribution from continuous or
                          recombination phenomena;  and
                                    D-16                                 10/91

-------
                                             Exhibit D  ICP-AES


3.1.1.4    Background contribution from stray light from the
           line   emission of high concentration elements.

           The first of  these effects can be compensated by
           utilizing a computer correction of the raw data,
           requiring the monitoring and measurement of the
           interfering element.  The second effect  may require
           selection of  an  alternate wavelength.  The third  and
           fourth effects can usually be compensated by  a
           ''-• kground correction adjacent to the analyte line.
           lit  -Wit-inn,  users of simultaneous multi-element
           iiistrunpfxiration oust assume the responsibility  of
          verifying the absence of spectral interference  from
          an element that could occur in a sample but for
          which there is no channel in the instrument array.

          Listed in Table  VI,  Exhibit C,  are some interference
          effects for  recommended wavelengths.   The data  in
          Table  VI, Exhibit C, are  intended for use only  as a
          rudimentary guide for the  indication  of potential
          spectral  interferences.  For this  purpose, linear
          relations between concentration and intensity  for
          the analytes and  the interferents  can be  assumed.
          The interference  information, which was collected at
          the Ames Laboratory, is expressed  as analyte
          concentration  equivalents  (i.e., false analyte
          concentrations) arising from 100 mg/L of  the
          interferent element.

          The suggested  use of this  information is  as follows:
          Assume that arsenic  (at 193.696 nm) is to be
          determined in  a. sample containing  approximately 10
          mg/L of aluminum.  According to Table VI,  Exhibit C,
          100 mg/L of aluminum would yield a false  signal for
          arsenic equivalent to approximately 1.3 mg/L.
          Therefore, 10  mg/L of aluminum would  result  in a
          false  signal for  arsenic equivalent to approximately
          0.13 mg/L.  The reader is  cautioned that  other
          analytical systems may exhibit somewhat  different
          levels of interference than  those  shown  in Table VI,
          Exhibit C, and that the interference  effects  must be
          evaluated for  each individual system.  Only those
          interferents listed were  investigated and the blank
          spaces in Table VI, Exhibit  C,  indicate  that
          measurable interferences were not observed from the
          interferenc  concentrations listed in  Table V,
          Exhibit C.   Generally,  interferences  were
          discernible  if they  produced peaks or background
          shifts corresponding to 2-5% of the peaks generated
          by the analyte concentrations also listed in Table
          V,  Exhibit C.  At present,  information on the  listed
                    D-17                                 io/91

-------
                                                            Exhibit D ICP-AES


                         silver and potassium wavelengths are not available
                         but it has been reported that second order energy
                         from Che magnesium 383.231 nm wavelength interferes
                         wich the listed potassium line at 766.491 nm.

      3.1.2   Physical interferences are generally considered to be effects
              associated with the sample nebulization and transport
              processes.  Such properties as change in viscosity and  surface
              tension can cause significant inaccuracies especially in
              samples which may contain high dissolved solids and/or  acid
              concentrations. The use of a peristaltic pump may lessen these
              interferences.  If these types of interferences are operative,
              they must be reduced by dilution of the sample and/or
              utilization of standard addition techniques.  Another problem
              which can occur from high dissolved solids is salt buildup at
              the tip of the nebulizer.  This affects aerosol flow rate
              causing instrumental drift.

              Vetting the argon prior to nebulization, the use of a tip
              washer, or sample dilution have been used to control this
              problem.   Also, it has been reported that better control of the
              argon flow rate improves instrument performance.  This  is
              accomplished with the use of mass flow controllers.

      3.1.3   Chemical interferences are characterized by molecular compound
              formation, ionization effects and solute vaporization effects.
              Normally these effects are not pronounced with the ICP
              technique, however, if observed they can be minimized by
              careful selection of operating conditions (that is, incident
              power, observation position, and so forth), by buffering of the
              sample, by matrix matching, and by standard addition
              procedures.  These types of interferences can be highly
              dependent on matrix type and the specific analyte element.
4.

4.1   Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometer.

      4.1.1   Computer controlled atomic emission spectrometer with
              background correction.

      4.1.2   Radio frequency generator.

      4.1.3   Argon gas supply, welding grade  or better.

4 . 2   Operational Requirements

      4.2.1   System  configuration  --  Because  of the differences between
              various makes and models of  satisfactory instruments,  no
              detailed operating  instructions  can be provided.   Instead, the
              analyst should follow the instructions provided  by the
              manufacturer of the particular instrument.   Sensitivity,
               instrumental detection limit,  precision, linear  dynamic range,
              and interference effects must be investigated and established

                                    D-18                               10/91

-------
                                                            Exhibit D ICP-£S
                                       -

               for each individual analyte line on that particular instrument.
               All measurements must be within the instrument  linear range
               where correction factors are valid.

               IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE
               INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
               THE ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO
               MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL DATA CONFIRMING INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE
               AND ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

               The data must  include  hardcopies or computer  readable storage
               •edia which can be  readily  examined by an audit teaa.  The data
               oust demonstrate the presence  or absence of all spectral
               interferences,  including, but  not limited to, the ones listed
               in Table VI of Exhibit C.   The data must demonstrate defendable
               background correction  points.   This applies to  simultaneous and
               sequential  ICP instruments.  Sequential  ICP data must
               demonstrate the ability  to  select the  correct peak from a
               spectrum in which nearby peaks from interferents are present.
5.    ^BACEJTS AND STANDARDS (SEE PART A)

5.1   Matrix matching, with the samples,  is mandatory for all blanks,
      standards and quality control samples, to avoid inaccurate
      concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

S.2   Mixed calibration standard solutions for ICP -• Prepare nixed
      calibration standard solutions by combining appropriate volumes  of the
      stock solutions, see PART A,  in volumetric flasks.   Add 2 mL of  (1+1)
      HN03 and 10 mL of (1+1)  HC1 and dilute to 100 mL with ASTM Type  I
      water. Prior to preparing the mixed standards, each stock solution
      should be analyzed separately to determine possible spectral
      interference or the presence of impurities.   Care should be  taken  when
      preparing the mixed standards that the elements are compatible and
      stable. Transfer the mixed standard solutions to a FEP fluorocarbon or
      unused polyethylene bottle for storage.   Fresh mixed standards should
      be prepared as needed with the realization that concentration can
      change on aging.  Calibration standards must be initially verified
      using a quality control sample and monitored weekly for stability.

      Although not specifically required, some typical calibration standard
      combinations follow when using those specific wavelengths listed in
      Table 1.

      5.2.1   Mixed standard solution I  -  - Manganese, beryllium,  cadmium,
              lead, and zinc.

      5.2.2   Mixed standard solution II  -  -  Barium,  copper, iron,  vanadium,
              and cobalt.

      5.2.3   Mixed standard solution III  -  -  Molybdenum, silica,  arsenic,
              and selenium.
                                   D-19                                10/91

-------
                                 .                           Exhibit 0 ICP-AES


       5.2.4   Mixed standard solution IV • - Calcium,  sodium, potassium,
               aluminum, chromium, and nickel.

       5.2.5   Mixed standard solution V - - Antimony,  boron, magnesium,
               silver, and thallium.

               NOTE:  If the addition of silver to the  recommended acid
               combination results in an initial precipitation,  add 15 mL of
               ASTM Type I water and warm the flask until the solution clears.
               Cool and dilute to 100 mL with ASTM Type I water.   For this
               acid combination the silver concentration should be limited to
               2  mg/L.   Silver under these conditions is stable  in a tap water
               matrix  for 30 days.   Higher concentrations of silver require
               additional HC1.

5.3   Two types of blanks are required for ICP analysis; the calibration
      blank is used in establishing the analytical curve while the
      preparation blank is used to correct for possible contamination
      resulting from varying amounts of the acids used  in the sample
      processing.

      5.3.1    The  calibration blank is prepared by diluting  2 mL of (1+1)
               HNO3  and  10 mL of  (1+1) HC1 to 100 mL with ASTM Type  I water.
               Prepare sufficient quantity to be used to flush the system
               between standards and samples.

      5.3.2    The preparation blank must contain all the reagents and  in  the
               same volume as used in the processing of the samples.  The
               reagent blank must be carried through the complete procedure
               and contain the same acid concentration in the final  solution
               as the sample solution used for analysis  (see  Exhibit E).

5.4   The Interference Check Solution(s) (ICS)  is prepared to contain known
      concentrations of interfering elements that will  demonstrate the
      magnitude of interferences and provide an adequate test of any
      corrections.   The ICS is prepared by the  analyst, if not previously
      provided (Exhibit E).   The ICS is used to verify  that the interference
      levels are corrected by adequate background correction and within
      quality control limits.

6.     PROCEDURE

6.1   Set up instrument with proper operating parameters established in
      Section 4.2.   The instrument must be allowed to become thermally stable
      before beginning.  This usually requires  at least 30 min. of  operation
      prior to calibration.

6.2   Initiate appropriate operating configuration of computer.

6.3   Calibration and Sample Analysis

      6.3.1    Profile and calibrate  instrument  according to instrument
               manufacturer's  recommended procedures, using matrix matched,
               mixed calibration  standard solutions such as those described in

                                   D-20                                10/91

-------
7.
                                                            Exhibit D ICP-AES


               5.1.   Calibrate  the  instrument for  the  analytes  of interest
               using the calibration blank and at  least a single  standard.
               Flush the system with the  calibration blank between each
               standard.   Use the average intensity of multiple exposures for
               both  standardization and sample  analysis.   A minimum of two
               replicate exposures are required. The raw data must include  the
               concentrations of elements in  each  integration as  well  as the
               average .

      6.3.2    Begin the sample run flushing  the system with the  calibration
               blank solution between each sample.

      6.3.3    Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more  concentrated than
               the linear range for an analyte.
7.1   If dilutions were performed,  the appropriate factor must be applied to
      sample values.

7.2   Appropriate concentration units  must be specified on the required
      forms.  The quantitative values  shall be reported in units of
      micrograms per liter (ug/L)  for  aqueous samples,  NO other units are
      acceptable.
8.    Qfl^-'p'T COHTROL

8.1   Quality control must be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

8.2   All quality control (QC) data must be submitted with each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.

8,3.   The interference check solution(s) (ICS) is prepared to contain known
      concentrations of interfering elements that will demonstrate  the
      magnitude of interferences and provide an adequate test of any
      corrections.  The ICS is used to verify that the interference levels
      are corrected by the data system within quality control limits.

9.    REFERENCES

1.   Annual Book of ASTM Standards,  Part 31.

2.   "Carcinogens - Working With  Carcinogens," Department of Health,
     Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
     Control, National Institute  for Occupational Safety and Health,
     Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.

3.   Garbarino, J.R. and Taylor,  H.E., "An Inductively-Coupled Plasma Atomic
     Emission Spectrometric Method for Routine Water Quality Testing,"
     Applied Spectroscopy 33, No. 3(1979).

4.   Handbook for Analytical Quality Control  in Water and Uastewater
     Laboratories, EPA-600/4-79-019 .
                                   D-21                                10/91

-------
                                                            Exhibit 0  ICP-AES


5.   "Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometric Method of
     Trace Elements Analysis of Water and Waste", Method 200.7 modified by
     CLP Inorganic Data/Protocol Review Committee; original method by
     Theodore D. Martin, EMSL/Cincinnati.

6.   "Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes." EPA- 600/4-79-020.

7.   "OSHA Safety and Health Standards. General Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
     Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
     January 1976).

8    'Safe./ in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,  American Chemical Society
     ?ubl..\!7rf-.ions, Committee on Chemical Safety,  3rd Edition,  1979.

9.   Winefordner,  J.D.,  "Trace Analysis:   Spectroscopic Methods for
     Elements,"  Chemical Analysis,  Vol.  46,  pp. 41-42.

10.   Winge, R.K.,  V.J. Peterson,  and V.A.  Fassel,  "Inductively Coupled
     Plasma-Atomic Emission  Spectroscopy Prominent Lines ,*  EPA-600/4-79-017.
                                   D-22                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 206.3
                                    FART C
             HYDRIDE GENERATION INDUCTIVELY COUPLED PLASMA-ATOMIC
                         EMISSION  SPECTROMETRIC METHOD
1.    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

1.1   This method covers the determination of antimony, arsenic and selenium
      in low concentration waters.

1.2   The method is optimized for selenium, the least sensitive element,
      which compromises the achievable sensitivities of antimony and arsenic.

1.3   The hydride generation system uses a high sodium borohydride to sample
      ratio to minimize interferences.  All sensitivities are somewhat
      compromised by this approach.

1.4   Many spectral interferences common to the pneumatic nebulization ICF
      analysis are eliminated.

1.5   Detection limits are lowered generally by a factor of ten over
      pneumatic nebulization ICP analysis.

2.    SUMMARY QP METHOD

2.1   The efficiency with which the volatile hydrides of antimony,  arsenic
      and selenium are generated is highly dependent on their oxidation
      states.   The volatile hydrides of arsenic and antimony are most
      efficiently formed from +3 oxidation state while the volatile hydride
      of selenium is most efficiently generated from the +4 oxidation step.
      Aliquots of the sample are heated after the addition of an equal volume
      of concentrated hydrochloric acid.  The chloride-chlorine couple
      developed reduces any selenium (VI) present to the selenium (IV)
      oxidation state.  Selenium must be present in the (IV) oxidation state
      to form a hydride.

2.2   In a continuous flow system, the samples are reacted with sodium
      borohydride,  followed by potassium iodide, to produce the volatile
      hydrides.  The iodide-iodine couple reduces any arsenic (V) and
      antimony (V)  to their plus three oxidation states.  This circumvents
      the effect of the different hydride formation reaction rates of the
      different oxidation  states.  The addition of the potassium iodide
      after the addition of the sodium borohydride eliminates the formation
      of elemental selenium by the iodide-iodine couple.  It is the
      laboratory's responsibility to verify that optimum conditions for
      antimony, arsenic and selenium were obtained.

2.3   The hydrides are stripped from the sample by argon gas and swept into
      the plasma of an Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Optical Emission
      Spectrometer.  The resulting free atoms are excited  into higher
      electronic states.   Atomic and ionic line emission spectra
      characteristic of the particular elements are produced when the
      electrons decay back to lower energy levels.  The spectra are dispersed
      by a spectrometer and the intensity of specific  line  radiation(s) are

                                   D-23                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method  206.3


       monitored simultaneously or  sequentially by photomultiplier tubes.   The
       photocurrents produced  by the photomultiplier  tubes will increase  in
       direct  proportion  to  the concentration of the  elements  in the  sample
       within  the  linear  range  of a specific  (emission line.  The photocurrents
       are  processed and  controlled by a computer systejs and related  to
       concentration through a  calibration procedure.

 3.

 3.1    As discussed in Sections  2.1 and 2.2, proper adjustment of
       oxidation states of the  elements is important in obtaining accurate
       results.

 3.2    Some of the transition elements,  especially copper, cause suppression
       of the hydride formation by reacting to form insoluble salts.   Selenium
       is affected more than the other  elements because transition  metal
       selenides are very insoluble. The high acid strength and high sodium
      borohydride concentration help -to temper these  effects.   The use of the
      method of standard additions  compensates for these  effects.

 3.3    Spectral interferences common to the pneumatic  nebulization  analysis of
       these three elements are eliminated because  the  interfering  elements do
      not form hydrides and thus are not introduced into, the plasma.

4.    APPARATUS

4.1   Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometer

      4.1.1   Computer-controlled inductively coupled argon plasma optical
              emission spectrometer system.   NOTE: A fast sequential scanning
              instrument may be used if the Quality Control requirements set
              forth in this method can be met, although a simultaneous
              instrument is the  instrument of choice.

      4.1.2   Background correction capability.

      4.1.3   Radiofrequency generator and coupling system.

      4.1.4   Argon gas supply,  welding grade or better.

      4.1.5   Variable speed four channel peristaltic pump  and pump  tubing.

      4.1.6   Hydride Manifold.

4.2   Operational Requirements

      4.2.1   System Configuration -- Because of  the differences between
              various makes and models of satisfactory instruments,  no
              detailed operating instructions can be provided.  Instead, the
              analyst shall follow the instructions provided by the
              manufacturer  of the  particular  instrument.  Sensitivity,
              instrumental  detection limit,  precision, linear dynamic range,
              and interference effects must  be  investigated and established
              for each individual  analyte line  on that particular instrument.

                                   D-24                                10/91

-------
        ,                                               Exhibit D Method 206.3
        •

               All measurements must be within the instrument linear range
               where correction factors are valid.

               IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE
               INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
               THE ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO
               MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL DATA CONFIRMING INSTRUMENT  PERFORMANCE
               AND ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

               The data must include hardcopies or computer readable storage
               media which can be readily examined by an audit team.   The  data
               oust demonstrate defendable choices of instrument operating
               conditions which minimize interferences and optimize hydride
               generation.

5.    BBAffEPTS AND STANDARDS  (SEE PART A)

S.I   Fresh sodium borohydride solution (4.8% w/v in 0.25 N NaOH) must be
      prepared daily from ACS reagent grade chemicals.  The sodium
      borohydride solution is essentially at saturation and will require
      stirring with a magnetic stirrer during the analysis.

5.2   Potassium iodide solution (8% w/v) is prepared from ACS reagent grade
      chemicals.

5.3   Calibration Standard Stock Solutions are prepared by dilution of the
      stock standard solutions (See Part A) .  The final solution must contain
      all three elements at the same concentration in 50% HC1.  The standard
      stock solutions oust consist of antimony, arsenic, and selenium in
      their lower oxidation states of plus five, plus five, and plus six
      respectively.

      5.3.1   The concentration of  the  elements required in the calibration
              standard(s) will be dependent upon  the  instrumentation and  so
              the concentration used as well as the number  of standards used
              is left  to the  discretion of the analyst,  although at  least one
              calibration standard  and  a calibration  blank  are required for
              the calibration of the instrument.

5.4   Three types of blanks are required for ICP-Hydride analysis.   The
      calibration blank is used in establishing the calibration curve, the
      preparation blank is used to monitor for possible contamination
      resulting from the sample preparation procedure, and the rinse blank  is
      used to flush the system between all samples and standards.

      5.4.1   The calibration blank solution and  rinse blank both  consist of
              50%  (v/v)  HC1  in ASTM Type  I  water.   Note:'  As with  all
              digested samples, add an  equal volume of concentrated HC1 to
               the blank to  give a  50%  (v/v) HC1 analytical sample.  This  acid
              must be  from  the  same lot of  HC1 as that used in preparation  of
               the  standards.

      5.4.2    The  preparation blank*'fs  prepared as specified in Exhibit E.


                                   D-25                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 206.3


 5.5   The  continuing calibration verification standard final solution must.
      contain all three elements at the same concentration in 50% (v/v) HC1.

 5.6   Matrix matching, with the samples, is mandatory for all blanks,
      standards, and quality control samples,  to avoid inaccurate
      concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

 6.    PROCgDORg

 6.1   Set up the instrument with the proper operating parameters as
      established in Section 4.1.   The instrument must be allowed to become
      thermally stable before beginning the analysis.   This requires at least
      30 minutes of operation with the plasma  lit prior to calibration.

 6.2   Initiate appropriate operating configuration of the computer.

 6.3   Due to the diverse modifications of hydride manifolds,  no detailed
      operational instructions can be provided.   Instead,  the analyst should
      consult the manufacturer instructions on which type of manifold would
      be best utilized with their  particular instrument.

 6.4   The flow of the waste line from the phase  separator returning  to the
      pump will need to be optimized for each  particular  system.   This is
      necessary to prevent sample  carry-over and be checked and documented by
      continuously analyzing a blank solution  after a  high (greater  than 10
      mg/L) standard for each element.

6.5   The appropriate cycle times for sampling and rinsing must be determined
      for each system.   These criteria are to  be documented and reported in
      accordance with Section E of this method.   Direct monitoring of the
      photocurrent from the detector system for  one of the elements  should be
      conducted to establish when the signal is  at steady state,  both for the
      sample response and in rinsing the sample  from the  system.
      Alternatively, sequential exposures of about 5 to 10 seconds during a
      cycle can establish the appropriate time intervals.  Rinse tines of at
      least 45 seconds are required between samples.  It is required that the
      contractor document these parameters quarterly in the form of  raw data
      results of this optimization.  To test for sample carry-over,  the
      analyst must analyze a high standard (greater than 10 mg/L) containing
      all the elements followed by the continuous aspiration for the blank
      solution.  The blank solution is to be continuously monitored  (in
      intensity units) until the intensity becomes stable at the background
      level.  The time required to completely remove all traces of any
      element is the required wash time.  If any sample solution analyzed
      contains any element at a concentration greater than the high standard
      solution analyzed above (prior  to dilution correction), the sample
      following that solution must be reanalyzed.  Alternately, the wash
      check above may be repeated and documented at a higher concentration
      than the sample.

 6.6   The use of a mass flow controller  on the  carrier argon flow is
      recommended in place of a rotameter.
                                   D-26                                10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit D Method 206.3
                                                                         i

 6.7   System Startup

       6.7.1   All pump lines should be pumping only ASTM Type I water.

       6.7.2   Place the sample pump line in the acid rinse solution.  If
               potassium iodide is being used with the hydride manifold, place
               its sample line in the KI solution.

       6.7.3   After the acid has entered the hydride manifold, start the
               sodium borohydride flow.   Just before the sodium borohydride
               cones in contact with the rinse solutions, slow the pump down
               to about half of its normal flow.   As soon as the borohydride
               cones in contact with the acid rinse,  a violent reaction starts
               that evolves hydrogen.   Be ready to make adjustments to help
               stabilize the plasma.

      6.7.4    As the plasma stabilizes,  slowly increase the flow of the  pump
               to the appropriate  level,  making adjustments  to stabilize  the
               plasma as the amount of hydrogen increases.   Hereafter,  do not
               let the  sample line remain out of the  rinse solution or a
               sample too long.  If the borohydride is  allowed to build up  in
               the separator without constant acid introduction, the plasma
               will be  extinguished once  acid is introduced.   To stop the
               analysis, place the  borohydride  line in water and continue
               pumping  the acid until hydrogen  evolution  ceases.  As the
               hydrogen evolution  decreases,  adjustments  will  be needed to
               stabilize the plasma.

7.            IOH AMP SAFr AHALTSIS
7.1   Calibrate the instrument using the appropriate matrix matched
      calibration standard solution(s) .   The calibration must include a
      calibration blank and at least one standard.

7.2   All standard, blank, and sample solutions must contain 50% (v/v) HC1.
      A change in the acid strength changes the slope of the calibration
      curve and can cause inaccurate results.  All digested samples must be
      diluted 1:1 with concentrated HC1 to give a 50% (v/v) HC1 matrix in the
      analytical sample.  The samples are then ready for analysis.

7.3   All standard, blank, and sample solutions must be heated at 90-100°C
      for a minimum of 10 minutes before being introduced into the hydride
      manifold.  In order to ensure that sufficient heat is being applied,
      the results of two portions of the standards that were heated to a
      different extent (e.g., one for 10 minutes versus one for 15 minutes)
      must be compared.  If the result yields a difference of more than 5%,
      the heating time must be increased until a difference of 5% or  less  is
      obtained.  All standards, blanks,  and sample solutions must be  analyzed
      after being heated for the length of time that yields a 5% difference
      or less .
                                   D-27
                                                                       10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 206.3
                                 *

7.4    In  order to determine  if the sample result is to be calculated by the
       Method of Standard Addition (MSA), an analytical spike must be
       performed and analyzed immediately after each sample analysis.  The
       analytical spike recovery must be used to determine the need  for  MSA as
       explained in Exhibit E.  The spiking solution volume must not exceed
       10% of the sample volume.  The diluent should be 50% (v/v) HC1 in the
       ASTM Type 1 water.

7.5    If MSA is required, follow the procedure given in Exhibit E.

7.6    Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more concentrated than  the  linear
       range for an analyte.

8.     CALCULATIONS

8.1    Calculate sample concentrations in (ug/L) by multiplying the  analytical
       concentration by the appropriate dilution factors used.

8.2   Appropriate concentration units must be specified on the required
       forms.  The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micrograms per liter (ug/L)  for aqueous samples,  NO other units are
      acceptable.

9.

9.1   Quality Control must be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

9.2   All quality control (QC)  data must be submitted with each data package
       as specified in Exhibit B.
                                    D-28                                 10/91

-------
                                            Exhibit D Methods 202.2 and  202.1
                                    PART D
       GRAPHITE FURNACE AhD FLAME ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROSCOFT METHOD
1.    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

1.1   Graphite furnace  atomic absorption procedures  are  provided  to achieve
      the necessary sensitivity and detection limits needed for the analysis
      of drinking and ground/well water.

1.2   Detection limits, sensitivity, and opi'  •* ranges  of the metals will
      vary with the various makes  and models o; satisfactory graphite furnace
      atomic absorption spectrophotometers.

1.3   Because of the difference between various makes and models of
      satisfactory instruments, no detailed instrumental operating
      instructions can be provided.  Instead, the analyst is referred to the
      instructions provided by the manufacturer of Chat instrument.

2.    SUMMARY OF METHOD

2.1   Using Che furnace technique in conjunction with an atomic absorption
      spectrophotometer, a representative aliquot of a sample  is placed in a
      graphite cube in the furnace, evaporated to dryness,  charred, and
      atomized.   Radiation from a given exciCed element is  passed through the
      vapor containing ground state atoms of that elemenc.  The intensity of
      Che transmicced radiation decreases in proportion to  the amount  of the
      ground state element in Che vapor.  The metal atoms Co be measured are
      placed in Che beam of radiation by increasing Che temperature of the
      furnace thereby causing Che injected specimen Co be volatilized.   A
      monochromator isolates the characteristic radiation from Che hollow
      cathode lamp and a photosensitive device measures Che attenuated
      transmitted radiation.

3.

3.1   The composition of the sample matrix can have a major effect on Che
      analysis.  By modifying Che sample matrix, eicher to remove
      interferences or to stabilize the analyte, interferences can be
      minimized.  Examples are the addition of ammonium nitrate to remove
      alkali chlorides and the addition of ammonium phosphate to retain
      cadmium.

3.2   Gases generated in the furnace during atomization may have molecular
      absorption bands encompassing the analytical wavelength. Therefore  the
      use of background correction is required for all furnace analysis.

3.3   Continuum background correction cannot  correct for all  types of
      background interference.  When the  background  interference  cannot be
      compensated for, choose an alternate wavelength, chemically separate
      Che analyte from the  interferent,  or use  an  alternate form  of
      background correction, e.g., Zeeman background correction.
                                   D-29                                10/91

-------
                                            Exhibit D Methods 202.2 and 202.1


3.4   Interferences from a smoke producing sample matrix can sometimes be
      reduced by extending the charring time at a higher temperature or
      utilizing an ashing cycle in the presence of air.  Care must be taken
      to prevent loss of analyte.

4.    APPARATUS

4.1   Atomic absorption spectrophotometer.   Single or dual channel, single or
      double beam instrument having a grating monochromator,  photonultiplier
      detector, adjustable slits, a wavelength range of 190 to 800 not,
      background correction, and provisions for interfacing with a recording
      device.

4.2   Graphite furnace.  Any furnace device capable of reaching the specified
      temperatures is satisfactory.
                                          i

4.3   Operational Requirements

      4.3.1   System configurations - - Because of the differences between
              various makes and models of satisfactory instruments, no
              detailed operating instructions can be provided.  Instead, the
              analyst should follow the instructions provided by the
              manufacturer of the particular instrument.  Sensitivity,
              instrumental detection limit, precision, linear dynamic range
              and interference effects must be investigated and established
              for each individual analyte on that particular instrument.

              IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE AHALTST TO VERIFY THAT THE
              INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
              THE ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO
              MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL DATA CONFIRMING INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE
              AND ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

              The data must include hardcopies or. computer readable storage
              media which can be readily examined by an audit team.  The data
              must demonstrate defendable choices of furnace temperature
              program and matrix modifiers.

5.    "fiA/rETTS AND STANDARDS (SEE PART A)

5.1   Matrix matching,  with the samples, is mandatory for all blanks,
      standards, and quality control samples, to avoid inaccurate
      concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

5.2   Preparation of standards.  Calibration standards are prepared by
      diluting stock metal solutions at the time of analysis and are
      discarded after use.  Prepare at least three calibration standards in
      graduated amounts in the appropriate range by combining an appropriate
      volume of stock solution in  a volumetric flask.  Add 2 mL of  (1+1) HN03
      and dilute to 100 mL with ASTM Type I water.  The calibration standards
      must be prepared using the same type of acid or combination of  acids  at
      the same  concentration.
                                    D-30                                10/91

-------
                                            Exhibit D Methods 202.2  and  202.1
                                                        •«*

5.3    Two  types  of blanks  are required  for GFAA analysis; the calibration
       blank is used  in establishing  the analytical curve while the
       preparation blank is used to correct for possible contamination
       resulting  from various acids used in the sample processing.

      The calibration blank is prepared by diluting 2 mL of (1+1) fflK>3 to 100
      mL with ASTM Type I water.  The preparation blank is' prepared  as
      specified  in Exhibit E.

6 .
6.1   Set up instrument with proper operating parameters established by the
      instrument manufacturer.  The individual steps; drying, thermal
      pretreatment, and atomization require careful consideration to ensure
      each process is carried out effectively. The instrument oust be allowed
      to become thermally stable before beginning.  This usually requires at
      least 30 min. of operation prior to calibration.  Background correction
      must be used.

6.2   Calibration and Sample Analysis

      6.2.1   Calibrate instrument according  to  instrument manufacturer's
              recommended procedures, using calibration standard solutions.
              Beginning with  the  calibration  blank and working towards the
              highest standard, run at  least  three standards and calibrate.

      6.2.2   In order to determine  if  the sample result is to be calculated
              by MSA, an analytical spike must be performed and analyzed
              after each sample analysis.  The analytical spike recovery must
              be used to determine the  need for  MSA  as explained in Exhibit
              E.   The spiking solution  volume must not exceed 10% of the
              sample volume.

6.3   If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given
      in Exhibit E.

6.4   Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more concentrated than the linear
      range for an analyte.

7.    CALCULATIOHS

7.1   If dilutions were performed, the  appropriate factor mist be applied to
      sample values.

7.2   Appropriate  concentration units must be specified on the required
      forms.  The  quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micro grams per liter  (ug/L) for aqueous samples, NO other units  are
      acceptable.
                                    D-31                                 10/91

-------
                                             Exhibit D Methods 202.2  and 202.1

 8.     FLAME AA

 8.1   Calciua (Method 215.1 CLP-M* Atonic  Absorption,  Plane  Technique)

 Optimum Concentration Range:   0.2-7 ng/L using  a wavelength  of 422.7 mn
 Sensitivity:   0.08  ng/L
 Detection Limit:  0.01 ng/L

 Preparation of S7?n^grd Solution

 1.   Stock Solution:   Suspend  1.250 g of 0*0)3  (analytical reagent grade),
     dried at  180°C for  1 hour before weighing, in de ionized distilled water
     and  dissolve cautiously with a nininun of dilute HCL.  Dilute to 1000 nL
     with deionized distilled water.  1 nL - 0.5 ng Ca (500 ng/L).

 2.   Lanthanum chloride solution:  Dissolve 29 g of La2^3t slowly and in
     small portions, in 250 nL cone.  HC1 (Caution:  Reaction is violent) and
     dilute to 500 nL with deionized distilled water.

 3.   Prepare dilutions of the stock calciun solutions to be used as
     calibration standards at the tine of analysis.  To each 10 nL of
     calibration standard and sample alike  add 1.0  nL of the lanthanum
     chloride solution, i.e.,  20 nL of standard or  sample + 2 nL LaCl3 - 22
     nL.
1.   Calcium hollow cathode lamp
2.   Wavelength:  422.7 nm
3.   Fuel:  Acetylene
4.   Oxidant:  Air
5.   Type of flame:  Reducing
Notes

1.   Phosphate, sulfate and aluminum interfere but are  nasked by the addition
     of lanthanum.   Because low calcium values result if the pH of the sample
     is above 7, both standards and samples  are prepared in dilute
     hydrochloric acid solution.   Concentrations of magnesium greater than
     1000 ng/L also cause low calciun values .   Concentrations of up to 500
     ng/L each of sodium, potassiun and nitrate cause no interference.
2.   Anionic chemical interferences can be expected if lanthanum is not used
     in samples and standards.

3.   The nitrous oxide-acetylene flame will  provide two to five tines greater
     sensitivity and freedon from chenical interferences.   lonization
     interferences should be controlled by adding a large amount of alkali to
     the sample and standards.  The analysis appears to be free from chemical
     suppressions in the nitrous oxide -acetylene flame.  C Atomic Absorption
     Newsletter 14, 29 [1975]).

4.   The 239.9 nm line may also be used.  This line has a relative
     sensitivity of 120.
 CLP-M modified for the Contract Laboratory Program.
                                   D-32                                10/91

-------
                                            Exhibit D Methods 202.2  and 202.1
         •t

8.2    Magnesium  (Method  242.1 CLP-M* Atomic Absorption, Plane Technique)

Optimum Concentration Range:  0.02-0.5 mg/L using a wavelength of  285.2  nm
Sensitivity:  0.007 mg/L
Detection Limit:  0.001  mg/L

Preparation of Stan*Mrd  Solution
1.   Stock Solution:  Dissolve 0.829 g of magnesium oxide, MgO (analytical
     reagent grade), in 10 mL of redistilled HN03 and dilute to 1  liter with
     deionized distilled water.   1 mL - 0.50 mg Mg (500 mg/L).

2.   Lanthanum chloride solution:   Dissolve 29 g of La2°3> slowly and in
     small portions  in 250 mL concentrated HC1 (Caution:  Reaction is
     violent), and dilute to 500 mL with deionized distilled water.

3.   Prepare dilutions of the stock magnesium solution to be used as
     calibration standards at the time of analysis.   To each 10 mL volume of
     calibration standard and sample alike add 1.0 mL of the lanthanum
     chloride solution,  i.e.,  20 mL of standard or sample +• 2 mL LaCl3 - 22
     mL.
Xnstir1 in|ftntal Pffr^iweters  (General)

1.   Magnesium hollow cathode  lamp
2.   Wavelength:   285.2 nm
3.   Fuel:   Acetylene
4.   Oxidant:   Air
5.   Type  of flame:   Oxidizing

Notes
1.   The interference caused by  aluminum at concentrations greater than 2
     mg/L is masked  by addition  of lanthanum.   Sodium,  potassium and calcium
     cause no interference at  concentrations less than 400 mg/L.

2.   The following line may also be used:  202.5 nm Relative Sensitivity 25.

3.   To cover the range of magnesium values normally observed in surface
     waters (0.1-20  mg/L), it is suggested that either the 202.5 nm line be
     used or the burner head be  rotated.  A 90° rotation of the burner head
     will  produce approximately one-eighth the normal sensitivity.
*CLP-M modified for the  Contract Laboratory Program.
                                    D-33                                10/91

-------
    ;                                         Exhibit D Methods  202.2 and 202.1


 8.3   Potassium (Method 258.1 CLP-M  Atonic  Absorption,  Plane  Technique)

 Optimum Concentration Range:   0.1-2 mg/L using a wavelength  of 766.5 no
 Sensitivity:   0.04 mg/L
 Detectioji Limit:   0.01 mg/L

            of Standard Solution
 1.   Stock Solution:  Dissolve 0.1907 g of KC1  (analytical reagent grade),
     dried at 11&1°C, in de ionized distilled water and make up to 1 liter. 1
     mL - 0.10 mg 1 (1.00 mg/L).
 2.   Prepare dilution- if the stock solution to be used as calibration
     standards at the tlae of analysis.  The calibration standards should be
     prepared using the same type of acid and at the same concentration as
     will result in Che sample to be analyzed either directly or after
     processing.
 Instrumental Parflmftyrs (General )

 1.   Potassium hollow cathode lamp
 2.   Wavelength:   766.5 nm
 3.   Fuel:   Acetylene
4.   Oxidant:  Air
 5.   Type of flame:  Slightly oxidizing

Notes

1.   In air-acetylene or other high  temperature  flames  (>2800°C) ,  potassium
     can  experience partial  ionization which  indirectly affects  absorption
     sensitivity.  The  presence of other  alkali  salts in the  sample  can
     reduce  this  ionization  and thereby enhance  analytical results.   The
     ionization suppress ive  effect of sodium  is  small if the  ratio of Na to K
     is under  10.  Any  enhancement due  to  sodium can be stabilized by adding
     excess  sodium (1000 ug/mL) to both sample and standard solutions. If
     •ore stringent control  of ionization is  required,  the addition  of cesium
     should  be considered.   Reagent  blanks muse  be analyzed to correct for
     potassium impurities  in the  buffer zone.
2.   The  404.4 nm line  may also be used.   This line  has a relative
     sensitivity  of 500.
3.   To cover the range of potassium values normally observed in surface
     waters  (0.1-20 mg/L),  ic is  suggested that  the  burner head  be rotated. A
     90°  rotation of  the burner head provides approximately one -eighth the
     normal  sensitivity.
 CLP-M modified for the Contract Laboratory Program.
                                   D-34                                10/91

-------
                                              Exhibit D Methods 202.2 and ,202.1


 8.4 Sodium (Method 273.1 CLP-M  Atomic Absorption, Flame Technique)

 Optimum  Concentration Range:  0.03-1 mg/L using a wavelength of 589.6 TUB
 Sensitivity:  0.015 mg/L
 Detection  Limit:  0.002 mg/L

 Preparation of Standard Solutions

 1.   Scock  Solution:  Dissolve 2.542 g of NaCl (analytical reagent grade),
     dried  at 140°C, in de ionized distilled water and make up to 1 liter.  1
     mL - 1 mg Na (1000 mg/L) .

 2.   Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to  be used as calibration
     standards at the time of analysis.  The calibration standards should be
     prepared using the same type of acid and at the  same concentration as
     will result in the sample to be analyzed either  directly or after
     processing.

             Parameters (genera;)
1.   Sodium hollow cathode lamp
2.   Wavelength:   589.6 nm
3.   Fuel:  Acetylene
4 .   Oxidant :   Air
5.   Type of flame:   Oxidizing

Notes

1.   The 330.2 nm resonance line of sodium, which has a relative  sensitivity
     of 185, provides a convenient way to avoid the need to  dilute more
     concentrated solutions of sodium.

2.   Low- temperature flames increase sensitivity by reducing the  extent of
     ionization of this easily ionized metal,   lonization may also be
     controlled by adding potassium (1000 mg/L) to both standards and
     samples .
9.    Q?^LrTT COHTROL

9.1   Quality control must be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

9 . 2   All quality control (QC) data must be submitted with each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.
 CLP-M modified for the Contract Laboratory Program.


                                   D-35                                ILC02.0

-------
                                                      Exhibit D Metpd 200.10
                                    PART E
                INDUCTIVELY COUPLED PLASMA - MASS SPECTROMETRY
1.    SCOPE AMD APPLICATION

1.1   Metals for which this method is applicable are listed in Table II,
      Exhibit C in low concentration water samples.   Instrument detection
      limits, sensitivities, and linear ranges for these elements will vary
      with the matrices, instrumentation,  and operating conditions.  Use of
      this method is restricted to spectroscopists who are knowledgeable in
      the recognition and the correction of spectral,  chemical,  and physical
      interferences in ICP-MS.  Experience requirement is 1 year on a
      commercially available IGF-MS.
2.
      CTTMMADV nv
2.1   The method describes the multi-elemental determination of analytes by
      ICP-MS.   The method measures ions produced by a radio-frequency
      inductively coupled plasma.  Analyte species originating  in a  liquid
      are nebulized and the resulting aerosol transported by argon gas  into
      the plasma torch.  The ions produced are entrained in the plasma  gas
      and by means of a water cooled interface,  introduced into a quadrupole
      mass spectrometer, capable of providing a. resolution better than  or
      equal to 1 amu peak width at 10% of the peak height.  The water-cooled
      interface consisting of tandem skimmers,  is differentially pumped and
      leads into the high vacuum chamber of the mass  spectrometer.   The ions
      and ion clusters produced in the plasma and those  formed  during the
      introduction of the ion beam into the mass spectrometer,  are sorted
      according to their mass-to-charge ratios and quantified with a channel
      electron multiplier.  Interferences must be assessed and  valid
      corrections applied or the data flagged to indicate problems.   Use of
      the internal standard technique is required to  compensate for
      suppressions and enhancements caused by sample  matrices.
3.
3.1   laobaric elemental Interferences in ICP-MS are caused by isotopes of
      different elements forming ions with the same nominal mass-to-charge
      ratio (m/z).   Table XIII, Exhibit C, shows isobaric interferences and
      the secondary masses which would be analyzed to correct for these
      interferences.  A data system must be used to correct for these
      interferences.  This involves determining the signal for another
      isotope of the interfering element and subtracting out the appropriate
      signal from the isotope of interest.  Data that is corrected must be
      noted in the  report along with  the exact calculations used.  Commercial
      ICP-MS instruments nominally provide unit resolution at 10% of  the  peak
      height, and very high  ion currents at adjacent masses can contribute  to
      ion signals at the mass of interest.  Table XII, Exhibit C, shows
      approximate concentrations at which adjacent masses give rise to a
      contribution  of 10 ug/L to the  analyte of interest at a resolution  of 1
      amu at 10% peak height, if the  mass were chosen for quantitation.   It
      should be noted that the information described in Table XII, Exhibit C,
      was experimentally derived and  the  interferences which are  described

                                   D-36                                10/91

-------
                                                      Exhibit D Method  200.10


       occur fron several different  sources.  One interference is the  effect
       of resolution on adjacent peaks.   This has a larger effect at 1 amu
       less Chan the interferent than  at  1 amu greater than the interferent' s
       mass due  to the  trapezoidal peak shape associated with a quadrupole
       mass spectrometer.  Another interference which would be observed  is  the
       formation of a hydride  ion.  These interferences only cause an
       interference at  1  ami greater than the interf erent's na*s.  It  should
       also be remembered that these interferences are not necessarily linear
       and attempts should not be made to extrapolate the values to a
       particular data  set.  The table has been included for its informational
       content alone.

 3.2    Isobarie  molecular  and doubly charged ion interferences in ICP-MS are
       caused by ions consisting of more  than one atom or charge.  Table XIII,
       Exhibit C,  lists isobaric molecular-ion interferences which could
       affect the analytes.  It should be noted that many of these
       interferences are extremely rare,  but adverse effects on data quality
      could occur if the individual constituents occurred in the sample at
      sufficiently high concentrations.   When the interferences cannot be
      avoided by the use of another isotope with sufficient natural
      abundance, corrections to the  data must be applied.   Corrections for
      molecular-ion interferences may  either be  based upon the  natural
      isotope ratios of the  molecular  ion or a determination of the actual
      amount of interference which occurs when the  interferant  is present.

      If a correction for an oxide ion is used,  the correction  may  be
      normalized to the extent of oxide  formation of an appropriate internal
      standard previously demonstrated to form the  same level of oxide as the
      interf erant.  This second type of  correction  has  been reported for
      oxide ion corrections  using ThO/Th for use on rare earth  elements.
      Most isobaric interferences that could affect ICF-MS  determinations
      have been identified in  the literature.

3.3   Physical interferences are effects associated with the sample
      nebulization and transport processes  as well  as ion-transmission
      efficiencies.  Nebulization and  transport  processes are those in which
      the matrix component causes a  change  in surface tension or viscosity in
      a manner different from  the standards used in performing  calibration.
      Internal standards have  been used  to  correct  for  these interferences.
      The interferences are  primarily  suppressions  and  are seen by  the
      lighter elements more  than the heavier elements.   The effects are
      greater for matrix components  with heavier atomic mass than for matrix
      components with lighter  atomic mass.   Changes in matrix composition
      therefore can cause significant  suppressions  and enhancements.
      Dissolved-solid levels can contribute deposits on the nebulizer tip of
      a pneumatic nebulizer  and on the interface skimmers (reducing the
      orifice size and the instrument  performance) .  Total solid levels below
      0.2% (2,000 ppm) have been recommended to  minimize solid deposition.
      Internal standards must  be affected to the same degree as the analyte
      to demonstrate that they compensate for these interferences.   A minimum
      of three internal standards, listed in Table  X Exhibit C, bracketing
      the mass range, must be  used.  When the intensity level of an internal
      standard is less Chan 30% or greater  than  125% of the intensity of the
      first standard used duiirg calibration, the sample must be reanalyzed

                                   D-37                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D HeChod 200.10


       after performing a fivefold (1+4)  dilution.   The intensity levels of
       the internal standards for the Continuing Calibration Blank and
       Continuing Calibration Verification Solution oust agree within ±20
       percent of the intensity level of  the internal  standard of the Initial
       calibration blank solution.   If they do not  agree,  terainate  the
       analysis,  correct the problem,  recalibrate,  and reanalyze  the previous
       10 samples at  no additional  cost.

 3.4   Memory interferences  are effects which are dependant  upon  the relative
       concentration  differences between  samples or standards  which  are
       analyzed sequentially.   Sample  deposition on the  sampler and  skimmer
       cones,  spray chamber  design,  and the type of nebulizer  used,  affect the
       extent of  the  memory  interferences  which are present.   To verify that
       memory effects do not have an adverse  impact on data  quality,  the
       memory test must be performed on the tuned and calibrated instrument
       before any analyses are  performed.   A multielement memory test solution
       containing levels of  analytes as specified in Table IX, Exhibit C, is
       aspirated  into the system for a normal sample exposure period.   A blank
       solution is then introduced, noting  the time when the uptake  tube is
       switched to the  blank solution.  After the normal routine rinse  time
       has elapsed, begin a  routine analysis of the blank solution.   Inspect
       the resulting  data Co see  if any analytes are in excess of the IDL.  If
       there  are, reanalyze  the blank to eliminate the possibility of actual
       blank  contamination.  A decreased value on the second analysis
       indicates a memory problem rather than blank contamination.  If a
      memory problem does exist  (see Exhibit E) for a given analyte, increase
       the rinse time until  the system passes die memory test.  If the
       increased rinse time  is not feasible from a sample throughput
       standpoint, a hardware change may be necessary.
4.    ^fT^WfOS AND

4.1   Inductively coupled plasma - mass spectrometer:

      4.1.1    System capable of  1 amu resolution from 6 -253 amu with a data
               system that  allows corrections for isobaric  interferences and
               the  application of the internal standard technique.   Use of a
               mass -flow controller for the nebulizer argon and a peristaltic
               pump for the sample solution are recommended.

      4.1.2    Argon gas supply:  high-purity grade  (99.99%)

4 . 2   Operational Requirements

      4.2.1    System Configuration -- Because of the differences between
               various makes and  models of satisfactory  instruments, no
               detailed operating instruction can be provided.   Instead, the
               analyst should follow  the  instructions provided by the
               manufacturer of the particular instrument.   Sensitivity,
               instrumental detection limits  (IDL's), precision,  linear
               dynamic range and  interference effects must be established for
               each analyte on a  particular instrument.   All  reported
                                   D-38                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit 0 Method 200.10
                                                          •**

                measurements must be within the instrumental linear ranges.
                The  analyst must maintain quality control data confirming
                instrument performance and  analytical results.

                IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE
                INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AMD OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
                THE  ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO
                MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL DATA CONFIRMING INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE
                AND  ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

                The  data must include hardcopies and computer readable storage
                media which can be readily  examined by an audit team.   The data
                must demonstrate defendable choices of instrument operating
                conditions which minimize interferences such  as oxides.

 4.3   Precautions must be taken  to protect the channel electron multiplier
       from high ion currents.  The channel electron multiplier  suffers  from
       fatigue  after being exposed to high  ion currents.  This fatigue can
       last from several seconds to hours depending on the extent of exposure.
       During this time period, response factors are constantly changing which
       invalidates the  calibration curve, causes instability, and invalidates
       sample analyses.  Samples run during such periods are required reruns
       at no  additional cost.

4.4    Sensitivity,  Instrument Detection Limits (IDL's),  precision,  linear
       dynamic  range, and interference effects must be established for each
       analyte  on a  particular instrument.  These parameters  must be
       determined for each configuration used if an instrument is equipped
      with dual detector hardware.  All reported measurements must be within
       the  instrumental linear dynamic ranges.  All reported  measurements from
      a less sensitive detector configuration must exceed five times Che
      documented instrumental detection limit for that detector
      configuration.  The analyst must maintain quality control data
      confirming instrument performance and analytical results.
5 .    MjA/fEffFS AND STANDARDS (SEE PART A)

5.1   Acids used in the preparation of standards and for sample processing
      must be below the IDL's for the analytes of interest for the purpose of
      a study.  Redistilled acids or ultra-pure acids are required for use
      with ICP-MS because of the high sensitivity of ICP-MS.  Nitric acid at
      less than 2 percent (v/v) is preferred for ICF-MS to minimize damage to
      the interface and to minimize isobaric molecular -ion interferences with
      the analytes.  Many more molecular -ion interferences are observed on
      the analytes when hydrochloric and sulfuric acids are used, as
      demonstrated in Table XIII, Exhibit C.  Concentrations of antimony and
      silver above 300 ug/L require 1%  (v/v) HC1 for stability.

5.2   Internal standards must be used to monitor and correct for changes that
      occur from differences between standards and samples.  This information
      must be clearly reported in the raw data.  The changes for which
      internal standards correct are primarily physical interferences.
      Internal standards must be present in all standards and samples at
      identical levels by mixing the internal standard to the solution being

                                   D-39                                10/91

-------
                                                 Exhibit D Method 200.10
                                           *

 nebulized prior  to  the nebulizer.   This  may be accomplished by using a
 second  channel of the  peristaltic  pump to add the  internal standard to
 the  uptake  tube.  If adding  the solution to the  uptake  tube is not used
 then the internal standard must be added in two  separate aliquots to
 the  samples and  standards to prevent  the possibility of improperly
 spiking the internal standard levels.  The double  spiking ensures that
 misquantitation will not occur based  upon a single internal standard
 spike.  Double spiking may occur either  by adding  a constant volume of
 internal standard concentrate to identical volumes of the standards and
 prepared samples, or by diluting the  internal standard  to the
 appropriate level for  its use in the analyses.   One typical example is
 to measure out 10.0 mL of all standards and samples into  individual
 containers, then 0.100 mL of a 10 mg/L solution of the  internal
 standard is added to each of the containers.   This  adds identical
 amounts of the internal standard to each solution  for analysis.  The
 concentrations of the analyte levels in the standards do not have  to be
 corrected for the dilution which occurs because the dilution is
 canceled out when corrections to the samples are made for their
 dilution.

 5.2.1   Bismuth  internal standard  solution, stock,  1 mL - 100  ug Bi:
        Dissolve 0.1115 g Bi203 in a minimum amount of  dilute  HNO3.
        Add 10 mL cone. HNO3 and dilute  to 1,000 mL with ASTM  Type I
        water.

 5.2.2   Holmium  internal standard  solution, stock,  1 mL - 100  ug Ho:
        Dissolve 0.1757 g Ho2(C03)2-5H20) in 10 mL ASTM Type I water
        and 10 mL HNO3.  After dissolution is complete, warm the
        solution to degas.  Add 10 mL cone. HNO3 and dilute to 1,000 mL
        with ASTM Type I water.

 5.2.3   Indium internal standard solution,  stock,  1 mL  - 100 ug  In:
        Dissolve 0.1000 g indium metal in 10 mL cone. HNO3.  Dilute to
        1,000 mL with ASTM Type 1  water.

5.2.4   Lithium  internal standard  solution, stock,  1 mL - 100  ug 6 LI:
        Dissolve 0.6312 g 95 atom  % enriched 6Li,  U2C03  in 10 ml of
        ASTM Type 1 water and 10 mL HN03.  After dissolution is.
        complete, warm the solution to degas.  Add 10 mL cone. HNC>3 and
        dilute to 1,000 mL with ASTM  Type I water.

5.2.5   Molybdenum solution, stock, 1 mL - 100 ug  Mo:   Dissolve 0.2043
        g (NH4>2MoO4 in ASTM Type  I water.  Dilute to 1,000 mL with
        ASTM Type I water.

5.2.6   Rhodium  internal standard  solution, stock, 1 mL - 100  ug Rh:
        Dissolve 0.3593 g ammonium hexachlororhodate  (III) (NH^RhClg
        in 10 mL ASTM  Type I water.   Add 100 mL  cone. HC1 and  dilute  to
        1,000 mL with  ASTM Type I  water.

5.2.7   Scandium internal standard solution, stock, 1 mL - 10O ug Sc:
        Dissolve 0.15343 g Sc203 in 10 mL  (1+1)  hot HN03.  Add 5 ml
        cone. HN03  and dilute  to 1,000 mL with ASTM Type I water.
                             D-40                                10/91

-------
                                                      Exhibit D Method 200.10
          *
      5.2.8    Titanium  solution,  stock.  J mL - 100 ug Ti:  Dissolve 0.4133  g
               (NH4)2TiF6  in ASTM  Type  I  water.  Add 2 drops of cone. HF  and
               dilute to 1.000 mL  with  ASTH Type I water.

      5.2.9    Terbium internal  standard solution, stock,  1 mL -  100 ug Tb:
               Dissolve  0.1828 g Tb2(C03)3-5H20 in 10 mL (1+1) HN03.  After
               dissolution is complete, warm the solution to  degas.  Add  5 ml
               cone. HNO3  and dilute  to 1,000 mL with ASTM Type  I water.

      5.2.10   Yttrium internal  standard  solution, stock,  \ mL -  100 ug Y:
               Dissolve  0.2316 g Y2(C03)3' 3H20 in 10 mL  (1+iZ/ h»03.  Add  5 ml
               cone. HNO3  and dilute  to 1,000 mL with ASTM Type I water.

5.3   Mixed calibration standard solutions -- Dilute the stock-standard
      solutions to levels in the linear range for the  instrument in a solvent
      consisting of 1 percent (v/v) HN03  in ASTM  Type  I water along with the
      selected concentration of internal  standards such that there is  an
      appropriate internal standard element for each of the  analytes (see
      Table X, Exhibit C).  Prior  to preparing the mixed standards,  each
      stock solution must be analyzed separately  to  determine possible
      spectral interferences or the presence of impurities.   Care must  be
      taken when preparing the  mixed standards that  the  elements  are
      compatible and stable.  Transfer  the mixed standard solutions  to
      freshly acid-cleaned not  previously used FEP fluorocarbon bottles for
      storage.  Fresh mixed standards must be prepared as needed with  the
      realization that concentrations can change on  aging.  Calibration
      standards must be initially  verified using a quality control sample and
      monitored weekly for stability.  Although not  specifically required,
      some typical calibration standard combinations follow.

      5.3.1    Mixed  standard solution  I  -- Manganese,  beryllium,  cadmium,
               lead,  silver, barium,  copper,  cobalt,  nickel and zinc.

      5.3.2    Mixed  standard solution  II - Arsenic,  chromium, thallium,  and
               aluminum.

      5.3.3    Mixed  standard solution  III -- Antimony,  vanadium, iron.

      5.3.4    Mixed  standard solution  IV --  Bismuth,  holmium,  indium,
               scandium, yttrium,  and terbium.

      5.3.5    Mixed  standard solution  V  -- Rhodium.

               Note:     If the addition of silver to the recommended acid
                        combination results in an initial  precipitation,  add
                        15 mL of ASTM Type  I  water and warm the flask until
                        the solution  clears.  Cool and dilute  to  100 mL with
                        ASTM Type  I water.   For this acid combination  the
                        silver concentration must be limited  to  2 mg/L.
                        Silver under  these conditions  is stable  in a tap  water
                        matrix  for 30 days.
                                    D-41                                10/91

-------
                                                      Exhibit 0 Method 200.10


5.4   Three types of blanks are required for the analysis.  The calibration
      blank is used in establishing and monitoring the calibration curve, the
      preparation blank is used to monitor for (SO, ICB, CCB) possible
      contamination resulting from the sample preparation procedure, and the
      rinse blank is used to flush the system between all samples and
      standards.

      5.4.1   The calibration blank consists of  1  percent HN03  (v/v) in ASTM
              Type I water along with the selected concentration of internal
              standards such that there is an appropriate internal standard
              element for each of the analytes (see Table X, Exhibit C) .

      5.4.2   The preparation blank must contain all the reagents in the same
              volumes as used ir. processing the samples.  The preparation
              blank must be carried through the complete procedure and
              contain the same acid concentration  in the final solution as
              the sample solutions used for analysis (see Exhibit E).

      5.4.3   The rinse blank consists of 2 percent ffiK>3 (v/v) in ASTM Type I
              water.  Prepare a sufficient quantity to flush the system
              between standards and samples.

5.5   The Interference Check Solution(S)  (ICS)  is prepared to contain known
      concentrations of  interfering  elements that will demonstrate the
      magnitude of  interferences and provide an adequate test of any
      corrections.  The  ICS  solution is 'detailed in Table V, Exhibit C.   The
      chloride concentration provides  a  means to evaluate software
      corrections for chloride-related interferences such as  ,C1  O"1" on 51v"*"
      and 40Ar35Cl+ on  75As+.   Since the natural abundance of 35C1 at 75.8
      percent is  3.13 times  the   Cl abundance of 24.2 percent,  the ion
      corrections can be calculated with adjustments for isobaric
      contributions.   Iron is used to  demonstrate adequate resolution of the
      spectrometer  on manganese.   Molybdenum serves to indicate oxide effects
      on cadmium isotopes.  The other  components are present to evaluate the
      ability of the measurement scheme to correct for various molecular-ion
      isobaric interferences.  The ICS is used to verify that the
      interference  levels are corrected by the data system within quality
      control limits.

      5.5.1   Stock solutions for preparing  ICS  solutions A and AB  may  be
              provided  if available.  Otherwise,  refer to Table V,  Exhibit C.
              They must be  diluted before use according to  the  instruction
              provided.  The prepared ICS solutions  A and AB oust be  prepared
              weekly.

      5.5.2   Mixed ICS solution  I  may be prepared by adding 13.903 g
              Al(N03)3.9H20,  2.498  g  CaC03  dried at 180'C for 1 h before
              weighing, 1.000  g Fe, 1.658  g MgO, 2.305 g Na2C03,  and 1.767 g
               K2C03  to  25 mL 
-------
                                                      Exhibit D MeChoa 2C.10


       553    Mixed ICS solution II nay be prepared by  slowly adding 7.M g
               85% H3P04.  6.373 g 96%  H2S04.  40.024 g 37%  HC1, and 10.664 g
               critic acid CgC^Hg to 100 mL of ASTM Type I water.   Dilute to
               1.000 mL wich ASTM Type I water.

      5.5.4    Mixed ICS solution III  nay  be  prepared by adding 5  oL each of
               arsenic stock solution,  chromium  stock solution, copper stock
               solution,  and zinc stock solution, 10 mL  each of cobalt stock
               solution,  nickel stock  solution,  and vanadium stock solution,
               and 2.5 mL of cadmium stock solution.  Dilute to 100 mL with 2%
               HNO3.

      5.5.5    ICS A may be prepared by adding 10 mL of  mixed ICS  solution I,
               10  mL each of titanium  stock solution, and  molybdenum stock
               solution,  and 5  mL of mixed ICS solution  II.  Dilute  to  100 mL
               with ASTM Type I water.  ICS solution A must  be prepared fresh
               weekly.

      5.5.6    ICS AB may  be prepared by adding  10 mL of mixed ICS solution I,
               10  mL each  of titanium  stock solution and molybdenum stock
               solution,  5 mL of mixed ICS solution II,  and  2 mL of mixed  ICS
               solution III.  Dilute to 100 mL with ASTM Type I water.   ICS
               solution AB must be prepared fresh weekly.

6.    PROCEDURE

6.1   Initiate appropriate operating configuration of  instrument computer.

6.2   Set up the instrument with  the proper operating  parameters.   Allow  at
      least 30 minutes for the  instrument to equilibrate before analyzing any
      samples.  This must be verified by running the tuning solution (Table
      VII, Exhibit C) at  least  four times with relative  standard deviations
      of less  than 10% for the analytes contained in the tuning solution.

6.3   Conduct mass calibration and resolution checks using the tuning
      solution (100 ppb of the elements Li,  Co,  In,  and Tl).  The intensities
      on die forms in Exhibit B  (see Table VIII  in Exhibit C)  for the
      response factor criteria are recommendations which might be helpful
      when setting up the  instruments but are not required  criteria.  The
      mass calibration must meet  the criteria specified in Table VIII,
      Exhibit C,  if mass  calibration exceed those criteria  then the mass
      calibration must be  adjusted to  the correct values.   The resolution
      must also be verified  to  be less than 1.0 amu full  width at  10 percent
      peak height.  To verify,  the tuning solution must be  analyzed at the
      beginning and end of each 8 hour shift, and pass  the  tuning  criteria.

6.4   Calibration and  Sample Analysis

      6.4.1    Calibrate the instrument for  the  analytes of interest using the
               calibration blank and at least a  single standard according to
               the manufacturer's recommended procedure  for each  detector
               configuration which will be used  in analysis.  Flush the system
               with the rinse blank between  each standard solution.  Report
               each integration during the calibration and sample analysis and

                                   D-43                                ILC02.0

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 200.10


               use the average of the multiple integrations for both
               standardization and saaple analysis.  A minimum of two
               replicate integrations are required for both calibration and
               sample analysis.  The raw data must include the concentrations
               of elements in each integration as well as the average.
               Additionally, If different detector configurations are used,
               the raw data must indicate which detector configuration is
               being used.

               NOTE:  Some elements (such as Hg,  W,  and Mo)  require extended
               flushing times which need to be determined for each
               instrumental system.   Run Memory Test on solution in Table IX,
               Exhibit C,  Co verify that memory problems will not affect the
               data quality.

6.5   As a minimum, all masses which would affect data quality must be
      monitored to determine potential effects from matrix components on  the
      analyte peaks.  This information is to be used to assess data quality
      and as a minimum must include the masses which are boldfaced and
      underlined, listed in Table XIV, Exhibit C, for each element.  These
      masses must be monitored simultaneously in a separate scan or at the
      time quantification occurs.

6.6   Flush the system with the rinse blank solution for a least 30 seconds
      before the analysis of each sample.  Aspirate each sample for at least
      30 seconds before collecting data.

6 . 7   Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more concentrated than the linear
      range for an analyte.

7.    CALCULATIONS

7.1   If dilutions were performed, the appropriate corrections must be
      applied to the sample values .

7.2   Appropriate concentration units must be specified on the required
      forms.  The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micrograms per liter (ug/L) for aqueous samples.  No other units are
      acceptable .
8.    qn^LJTY CONTROL

8.1   Quality control must be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

8.2   All quality control (QC) data must be submitted with each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.

8.3   To obtain analyte data of known quality, it is necessary to measure for
      more than the analytes of interest in order to know the required
      interference corrections.  If the concentrations of interference
      sources (such a C, Cl, Ho, Zr, W) are below the levels that show an
      effect on the analyte level, uncorrected equations may be used provided
      all QA criteria are met.  It should be noted that monitoring  the
      interference sources does not necessarily require monitoring  the

                                   D-44                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 200.10


       interference itself, but that a molecular species may be monitored to
       indicate the presence of the interference.  When corrected equations
       are used all QA criteria must also be met.  Extensive QC for
       interference corrections are required at all times.   The monitored
       masses must include those elements whose oxygen, hydroxyl, chlorine,.
       nitrogen,  carbon and sulfur molecular ions which could impact the
       analytes of interest.   When an interference source is present, the
       sample elements impacted must be flagged to indicate (a) the percentage
       interference correction applied to the  data or (b)  an uncorrected
       interference.   The  isotope  proportions  for an element or molecular-ion
       cluster provide information useful for  quality assurance.   These tests
       will enable the analyst to  detect  positive or negative interferences
       that distort the accuracy of the reported values.

 8.4    The  interference check  solution(s)  (ICS)  is  prepared to  contain known
       concentrations  of interfering elements  that  will demonstrate  the
       magnitude of interferences  and provide  an adequate test  of any
       corrections.  The ICS is used to verify that the interference levels
       are  corrected by the data system within QC limits.

 9.     EZFERENCKS

 9.1    G. Horlick  et al.. Spectrochim. Acta 40B.  1555  (1985).

 9.2    A. L. Gray.  Spectrochim. Acta 40B,  1525 (1985); 41B,  151 (1986).

 9.3    J. J. Thompson and R. W. Houk, Appl. Spectrosc. 41, 801  (1987).

 9.4    J. W. McLaren et al., Anal.  Chem. 57, 2907 (1985).

 9.5    F. E. Kichte et al., Anal. Chem. 59, 1150  (1987).

 9.6    S. H. Tan and G. Horlick. Appl. Spectrosc. 40, 445 (1986).

9.7   M. A. Vaughan and G. Horlick, Appl. Spectrosc. 40, 434 (1986).

9.8   D. Beauchemin et al. , Spectrochim. Acta 42B, 467 (1987).

9.9   R. S. Houk.  Anal. Chem.   58,  97A  (1986).
                                   D-45                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit 0 Method 245.1
                                    PART F
                          MERCURY ANALYSIS IN WATER
 1.     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 1.1    In addition to inorganic forms of mercury, organic mercurials nay also
       be present.  These organo-mercury compounds will not respond to the
       cold vapor atonic absorption technique unless they are first broken
       dovn and converted to mercuric ions.  Potassium permanganate oxidizes
       many of these compounds, but recent studies have shown that a number of
       organic mercurials, including phenyl mercuric acetate and methyl
       mercuric chloride, are only partially oxidized by this reagent.
       Potassium persulfate has been found to give approximately 100% recovery
      when used as the oxidant with these compounds.  Therefore, a persulfate
      oxidation step following the addition of the permanganate has been
       included to insure that organo-mercury compounds, if present, will be
      oxidized to the mercuric ion before measurement.   A heat step is
      required for methyl mercuric chloride when present in or spiked to a
      natural system.   For distilled water the heat step is not necessary.

1.2   The range of the method may be varied through instrument and/or
      recorder expansion and sample size.   Using a 100  mL sample,  a detection
      limit of 0.2 ug Hg/L can be achieved.

2.    STMCART OP METHOD

2.1   The flame less AA procedure is a physical method based on the absorption
      of radiation at 253.7 nm by mercury vapor. Organic mercury compounds
      are oxidized and the mercury is reduced to the  elemental state and
      aerated from solution in a closed system.  The  mercury vapor passes
       through a cell positioned in the light path of  an atomic absorption
      spectrophotometer.  Absorbance (peak height) is measured as a function
      of mercury concentration and recorded in the usual manner.



3.1    Possible interference from sulfide is eliminated by the addition of
       potassium permanganate.  Concentrations as high as 20 mg/1 of sulfide
       as sodium sulfide do not interfere with the recovery of added inorganic
       mercury from distilled water  .

3.2    Copper has also been reported to interfere; however, copper
       concentrations as high as  10 mg/L had no  effect  on recovery  of mercury
       from spiked samples.

3.4    While the possibility of  absorption from certain organic substances
       actually being present  in the  sample does exist, EMSL has not
       encountered such  samples.   This  is  mentioned only to caution the
       analyst  of  the possibility.
                                    D-46                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 245.1
 4.    APPARATUS
4.1   Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer:  (See Note 1) Any atomic
      absorption unit having an open sample presentation area  in which  to
      mount the absorption cell is suitable. Instrument settings recommended
      by the particular manufacturer should be followed.

      NOTE 1:  Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of
      mercury using the cold vapor technique are commercially available and
      may be substituted for the atomic absorption spectrophotometer.

      IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE INSTRUMENT
      CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION CONDITIONS USED SATISFY THE ANALYTICAL
      REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL
      DATA CONFIRMING INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE AND ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

4.2   Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp:  Argon filled, or equivalent.

4.3   Recorder:  Any multi-range variable speed recorder that is compatible
      with the UV detection system is suitable.

4.4   Absorption Cell:  Standard spectrophotometer cells 10 cm long, having
      quartz end windows may be used.

4.5   Air Pump:  Any peristaltic pump capable of delivering 1 liter of air
      per minute may be used.

4.6   Flowmeter:  Capable of measuring an air flow of 1 liter per minute.

4.7   Aeration Tubing:  A straight glass fit having a coarse porosity.
      Tubing is used for passage of the mercury vapor from the sample bottle
      to the absorption cell and return.

4.8   Drying Tube:  6* X 3/4" diameter tube containing 20 g of magnesium
      perchlorate.  In place of the magnesium perchlorate drying tube, a
      small reading lamp with 60V bulb may be used to prevent condensation of
      moisture inside the cell.  The lamp is positioned to shine on the
      absorption cell maintaining the air temperature in the cell about  10*C
      above ambient.

4.9   Autoanalyzer system (for automated spec crone trie method)  including:

      4.9.1    Sampler with  provisions  for sample mixing.

      4.9.2    Proportioning pump.

      4.9.3    Mercury manifold.

      4.9.4    High temperature heating bath with two distillation coils.

      4.9.5    Vapor-liquid separator
                                    D-47                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 245.1


5.    BiRA7SffTs AMP STANDARDS (SEE PART A)

5.1   Sulfuric Acid, Cone:  Reagent grade.

      5.1.1   Sulfuric  acid, 0.5 N:  Dilute  14.0 a"   " cone,  sulfuric acid to
              1.0 liter with ASTM Type I  w.£er.

      5.1.2   Sulfuric  acid, 2 N:  Dilute 56 mL  of cone,  sulfuric acid to 1
              liter with  ASTM Type I water.

      5.1.3   Sulfuric  acid, 10%:  Dilute 100 mL cone, sulfuric acid to  1
              liter with  ASTM Type I water.

5.2   Nitric Acid,  Cone:  Reagent grade of low mercury content.

      5.2.1.  Nitric Acid, 0.5% Wash Solution:   Dilute 5 mL of concentrated
              nitric acid to 1 liter with ASTM Type I water.

5.3   Stannous Sulfate (Stannous  chloride may be  used in place of  stannous
      sulfate.)

      5.3.1   Manual method:   Add 25  g  stannous  sulf ate to 250 mL of 0.5 N
              sulfuric acid.   This  mixture is  a  suspension and should be
              stirred continuously  during use.

      5.3.2   Automated method:   Add 50 g stannous sulf ate to 500  mL of 2 N
              sulfuric acid.   This  mixture is  a  suspension and should be
              stirred continuously during use.

5.4   Sodium Chloride-Hyroxylamine Sulfate Solution (Hydroxylamine
      hydrochloride may be used  in place of hydroxylamine  sulf ate.)

      5.4.1   Manual method:   Dissolve  12 g of sodium chloride and 12 g of
              hydroxylamine sulfate in ASTM Type I water and dilute to 100
              mL.

      5.4.2   Automated method:   Dissolve 30 g of sodium chloride and 30  g  of
              hydroxylamine sulfate in ASTM Type I water to 1 liter.

5.5   Potassium Permanganate

      5.5.1   Manual method:   5% solution, w/v.  Dissolve 5 g of potassium
              permanganate in 100 mL of ASTM Type  I water.

      5.5.2   Automated method:

              5.5.2.1     0.5% solution, w/v.  Dissolve 5 g of potassium
                          permanganate in 1 liter of ASTM Type I water.

               5.5.2.2    0.1 N.  Dissolve 3.16 g of potassium permanganate in
                          ASTM Type I water and dilute  to  1 liter.
                                   D-48                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 245.1
5.6   Potassium Persulfate
      5.6.1   Manual method:   5%  solution, w/v.  Dissolve 5 g of potassium
              persulfate  in 100 mL  of ASTM Type I water.

      5.6.2   Automated method:   0.5% solution, w/v.  Dissolve 5 g potassium
              persulfate  in 1  liter of ASTM Type I water.

5.7   Working Mercury Solution:  Make successive dilutions of the stock
      mercury solution to obtain a working standard containing 0.1 ug per mL.
      This working standard and the dilutions  of the stock mercury solution
      should be prepared fresh daily.   Acidity of the working standard should
      be maintained at 0.15% nitric acid.   This acid should be added to the
      flask as needed before the addition of the aliquot.

5.8   Air Scrubber Solution:   Mix equal volumes of 0.1 N potassium
      permanganate and 10% sulfuric acid.

6.    FRflCZDORE

6.1   Matrix matching,  with the samples,  is  mandatory for  all blanks,
      standards,  and quality control samples to avoid inaccurate
      concentration values due to  possible standard curve  deviations.

6.2   Manual Spectrometrie Determination

      6.2.1   Calibration and Sample Analysis

              6.2.1.1    Transfer  0, 0.5,  1.0,  5.0 and 10.0 mL aliquots of
                         the working mercury solution containing 0 to 1.0 ug
                         of mercury to  a series of 300 mL BOD bottles.  Add
                         enough ASTM Type 1  water to each bottle to make a
                         total volume of 100 mL. Mix thoroughly and add 5 mL
                         of cone,   sulfuric  acid and 2.5 mL of cone, nitric
                         acid  to each bottle.  Add 15 mL of KMn04 solution to
                         each  bottle and allow to stand at least 15 minutes.
                         Add 8 mL of potassium persulfate to each bottle and
                         heat  for 2 hours in a water bath maintained at 95'C.
                         Alternatively,  cover  the BOD bottles with foil and
                         heat  in an autoclave  for 15 minutes at 120* C and 15
                         Ibs.   Cool and add 6  mL of sodium chloride-
                         hydroxylamine  sulfate solution to reduce the excess
                         permanganate.   When the solution has been
                         decolorized wait 30 seconds, add 5 mL of the
                         stannous sulfate solution and immediately attach the
                         bottle to the aeration apparatus forming a closed
                         system.  At this point the  sample is allowed to
                         stand quietly without manual agitation. The
                         circulating pump, which has previously been  adjusted
                         to a rate of 1 liter per minute, is allowed  to  run
                         continuously (see Note 4).  The  absorbance will
                         increase and reach maximum  within  30 seconds.  As
                         soon as 'the recorder pen levels  off, approximately 1
                         minute,  open the bypass valve and  continue the

                                   D-49                                10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit O Method 245.1


                          aeration until the absorbance returns to its minimum
                          value (see Note 5).  Close the bypass valve, remove
                          the stopper and frit from the BOO bottle and
                          continue the aeration.   Proceed with the standards
                          and construct a standard curve by plotting peak
                          height versus aicrograas of  mercury.

                          NOTE 4:  An open system  where the mercury vapor is
                          passed through the absorption cell only once may be
                          used instead of the  closed system.

                          NOTE 5:  Because of  the  toxic nature  of mercury
                          vapor precaution must be  taken to  avoid its
                          inhalatitn.  Therefore, a bypass has been included in
                          the  system  to either vent the  mercury vapor into an
                          exhaust hood or pass the vapor through  some
                          absorbing media, such as:  a)  equal volumes of  0.1 M
                          KHn04, and  10% H2SO4, or b) 0.25% iodine  in a 3% a
                          KI solution.  A specially treated charcoal  that vill
                          adsorb mercury vapor is available.

      6.2.2.  Transfer  100 mL, or an aliquot diluted Co 100 mL,  containing
              not more  than 1.0 ug of mercury, to a 300 mL BOD bottle.   Add 5
              •L of sulfuric acid and 2.5 mL of cone,  nitric acid mixing
              after each  addition.  Add 15 mL of potassium permanganate
              solution  to each sample bottle (see Note  6).  Shake  and add
              additional  portions  of potassium permanganate solution, if
              necessary,  until the purple color persists for at  least 15
              minutes. Add 8 mL of potassium persulfate to each  bottle and
              heat for 2  hours in a water bath at 95*C.

              NOTE 6:  The same amount of KMnO^ added  to the samples  should
              be present  in standards and blanks.

              Cool and add 6 mL of sodium chloride-hydraxylamine sulfate to
              reduce the  excess permanganate (see Note  7).  Purge the  head
              space in  the BOD bottle for at least 1 minute and  add  5 mL of
              Stannous  Sulfate and immediately attach  the bottle to  the
              aeration apparatus.  Continue as described under Calibration.

              NOTE 7:  Add reductant in 6 oL increments until KMnO4  is
              completely  reduced.

6.3   Automated Spectroneeric Determination

      6.3.1   Matrix matching, with  che samples,  is mandatory  for all blanks,
              standards,  and quality control samples  to avoid  inaccurate
              concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

      6.3.2   Calibration and  Sample Analysis

              6.3.2.1     From the Working Mercury solution prepare standards
                      • 'containing  O.'2,'0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0  and
                          20.0 ug Hg/L.

                                   D-50                                10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit D Method 245.1
               6.3.2.2    Sec up manifold.
               6.3.2.3    Feeding all the reagents  through the  system with
                          acid wash solution through the sample line,  adjust
                          heating bath to 105* C.  Pump reagents through the
                          system until a steady baseline is obtained.

               6.3.2.4    Turn on atomic absorption spectrophotometer ,  adjust
                          instrument settings as  recommended by the
                          manufacturer,  align absorption cell in light  path
                          for  maximum transaittance  and place heat lamp
                          directly over  absorption cell.

               6.3.2.5    Arrange working mercury standards from 0.0 to 20.0
                          ug Hg/L in sampler and start  sampling.  Complete
                          loading of sample tray with unknown samples.

               6.3.2.6    Prepare  standard curve by plotting peak height of
                         processed standards against concentration values.

      6.3.2   Determine concentration of samples by comparing sample peak
              height with standard  curve.

      6.3.3   After the analysis  is  complete put all lines except the
              sulfuric acid line  in  distilled water to wash out system.
              After flushing,  wash  out  the sulfuric acid line.   Also flush
              the coils in the high  temperature heating bath by pumping
              stannous sulfate through  the sample lines followed by distilled
              water.  This will prevent  build-up of oxides of manganese.
7.1   Determine the peak height of the unknown from the chart and read the
      mercury value from the standard curve.

7.2   Calculate the mercury concentration in the  sample by the formula:

                  ug Hg in                 1,000
      ug Hg/L  -   aliquot    x
                                   volume of aliquot in mL

7.3   Report mercury concentrations as follows:  Below 0.20 ug/L,  0.20 ug
      between 0.20 and 10.0 ug/L,  two significant figures; equal to or above
      10.0 ug/L,  three significant figures.

7.4   Appropriate concentration units must be specified on the required
      forms.  The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micrograms  per liter (ug/L)  for aqueous samples, NO other units are
      acceptable.

7.5   If dilutions were performed, the appropriate corrections must be
      applied to  the sample values.
                                   D-51                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 245.1
              COHTROL
8.1   Quality control must be perforaed as specified in Exhibit E.

8.2   All quality control (QC) data must be submitted with each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.
9.

1.   "Interim Methods for the Sampling and Analysis of  Priority  14th Edition,
     p. 156 (1975).1972.

2.   Analy. 2. p.  317 (1970). Annual Book of ASTM Standards,  Part  31,
     •Water",  Standard

3.   Brandenberger,  H.  and Bader,  H..  "The Determination of D3223-73,  p.  343
     (1976).

4.   Determining Mercury  in Water",  Technicon, Adv. in  Auto.  Environmental
     Monitoring and  Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati, Goulden,  P.D.  and Afghan,
     B.K.  "An  Automated Method for

5.   Kopp,  J.F., Longbottom, M.C.  and Lobring, L.B. "Cold Vapor Mercury by
     Flameless Atomic Absorption II,  A Static Vapor Method  for Determining
     Mercury", AWWA,  vol.  64, p.  20,  Jan.

6.   Method",  Atomic Absorption Newsletter 7,53  (1968).Ohio, August  1977,
     revised October 1980.Op. cit. (#1), Methods 245.1  or 245.2.Pollutants in
     Sediments and Fish Tissue," USEPA,

7.   Standard  Methods for the Examination of Water and  Wastewater
                                   D-52                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 335.2
                                    PART G
                  METHOD FOR TOTAL CYANIDE ANALYSIS IN HATER
1.    SCOPE AND
1.1   This method is applicable  to  the determination of cyanide in low
      concentration water samples.

1.2   The manual coloroaetric procedure is used for concentrations below  1
      ag/L of cyanide and is sensitive to about 10 ug/L.

1.3   The working range of the semi-automated spectrophotoaetric method is 5
      to 200 ug/L.   Higher level samples must be diluted to fall within the
      working range.

2.    SUMMARY OF METHOD

2.1   The cyanide as hydrocyanic acid (HCN)  is released froa cyanide
      coaplexes  by means of  a reflux-distillation operation and absorbed in a
      scrubber containing sodium hydroxide solution.  The  cyanide  ion in the
      absorbing  solution is  then determined  by volumetric  titracion or
      coloriaetrically.

2.2   In the  colorimetric measurement the  cyanide  is converted  Co  cyanogen
      chloride,  CNC1, by reaction with chloraaine-T at  a pH less than 8 .
      without hydrolyzing to the cyanate.  After the reaction is complete,
      color is formed on the addition of pyridine-pyrazolone or
      pyridinebarbituric acid reagent.  The  absorbance  is  read  at  620 na when
      using pyridine-pyrazolone  or 578 na  for pyridine-barbituric  acid.  To
      obtain colors  of  comparable intensity,  it is essential to have the at
      salt content in both the sample and  the standards.

3.

3.1   Interferences  are eliminated or reduced by using the distillation
      procedure  described in Procedure 6.1.

3.2   Sulfides adversely affect  the colorimetric and titration procedures.
      If a drop  of  the  distillate on lead acetate test paper indicates the
      presence of sulfides,  treat 25 mL more of the sample than that required
      for the cyanide determination with powdered cadmium carbonate.  Yellow
      cadmium sulfide precipitates if the saaple contains sulfide.  Repeat
      this operation until a drop of the treated saaple solution  does  not
      darken the lead acetate test paper.   Filter the  solution  through a  dry
      filter paper into a dry beaker, and from the filtrate measure  the
      saaple to be used for analysis.  Avoid a large excess of cadmium
      carbonate and a long contact tiae in order  to minimize a loss by
      complexation or occlusion  of cyanide on  the precipitated material.

3.3   The presence of surfactants may cause  the  sample to foaa during
      refluxing.  If this occurs, the addition of an agent such as Dow
      Corning 544 antifoam agent will prevent the foam from collecting in the


                                    D-53                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 335.2


      condenser.  Fatty acids will distill and form soaps under alkaline
      titration conditions, making the end point almost impossible  to detect.
      When this occurs, one of the spectrophotometric methods should be used.

4.    APPARATUS

4.1   Reflux distillation apparatus.   The boiling flask should be of 1 liter
      size with inlet tube and provision for condenser.  The gas absorber may
      be a Fisher-Hilligan scrubber.

4.2   Microburet,  5.0 mL (for titration)

4.3   Spec tropho tome ter suitable for  measurements at 578 nm or 620 nm with a
      1.0 cm cell or larger (for manual spectrophotometric method).

4.4   For automated spectrophotometric method:

      4.4.1   Sampler

      4.4.2   Pump

      4.4.3   Cyanide Manifold

      4.4.4   SCIC Colorimeter with 15 mm flowcells and 570 nm filters

      4.4.5   Recorder

      4.4.6   Data System (optional)

      4.4.7   Glass or plastic tubes  for the sampler

5 .     BKAJipmTS AHD STAHDAi^PS

5.1   Matrix matching,  with the samples,  is mandatory for all blanks,
      standards,  and quality control  samples to avoid inaccurate
      concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

5.2   Distillation and Preparation Reagents

      5.2.1   Sodium hydroxide solution, 1.25N:  Dissolve 50 g of  NaOH in
              ASTM Type I water, and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.

      5.2.2   Cadmium carbonate:  powdered

      5.2.3   Ascorbic acid:  crystals

      5.2.4   Sulfuric acid:  concentrated

      5.2.5   Magnesium chloride solution:  Weight 510 g of MgCl2.6H20 into a
               1000  mL flask,  dissolved and dilute  to 1 liter with ASTM Type I
              water.
                                   D-54                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method  135.2
 5.3   Stock Standards  and Titration Reagents
       5.3.1    Stock cyanide  solution:   Dissolve 2.51  g of KCN and  2  g KOH in
               1 liter of ASTM Type  I water.  Standardize with 0.0192 N AgNC>3.

       5.3.2    Standard cyanide solution,  intermediate:  Dilute 50.0  mL of
               stock (1 mL -  1 Bg CN) to 1000 mL with  ASTM Type I water.

       5.3.3    Standard cyanide solution:  Prepare fresh daily by diluting
               100.0 mL of intermediate  cyanide solution tc 1000 nL with ASTM
               Type  I water and store in a glass stoppered bottle.  1  mL - 5.0
               ug CM  (5.0 «g/L)-

      5.3.4    Sodium hydroxide solution,  0.25 N:  Dissolve 10 g or NaOH in
               ASTM Type I water and dilute to 1 liter.

5.4   Manual Spectrophotometric Reagents

      5.4.1    Sodium dihydrogenphosphate,  1 M:   Dissolve 138 g of NaH2PC>4.H20
               in a liter of ASTM Type I water.  Refrigerate this solution.

      5.4.2   Chloramine-T solution:  Dissolve 1.0 g of white,  water soluble
              chloramine-T in 100 mL of ASTM Type I water and refrigerate
              until ready to use.   Prepare fresh weakly.

      5.4.3   Color Reagent-One of the following may be used:

              5.4.3.1    Pyridine-barbituric acid reagent:   Place 15  g of
                         barbituric acid in a 250 mL volumetric  flask and add
                         Just enough ASTM Type I water to wash  the  sides of
                         the flask and wet the barbituric acid.   Add  75 mL of
                         pyridine and mix.  Add 15 mL of HC1 (sp  gr 1.19),
                         mix, and cool to room temperature.  Dilute to 250 mL
                         with ASTM Type I  water and mix.   This  reagent is
                         stable  for approximately six months if stored in a
                         cool,  dark place.

               5.4.3.2    Pyridine-pyrazolin-5-one solution:

                         5.4.3.2.1     3-Methyl-lphenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one
                                     reagent,  saturated solution:  Add 0.25 g
                                     of 3-methyl-l-phenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one
                                     to 50  mL of ASTM Tpye  I water,  heat to
                                      60"C with stirring.  Cool to  room
                                      temperature.

                         5.4.3.2.2    3,3'Dimethyl-1,1'-diphenyl [4,4'-bi-2
                                      pyrazolin]-5,5'dione (bispyrazolone):
                                      Dissolve 0.01 g of bispyrazolone in 10
                                      mL of pyridine.

                         5.4.3.2.3    Pour solution (5.4.3.2.1) through
                                      nonacid-washed filter  paper.   Collect
                    •                  the filtrate. Through  the same  filter

                                   D-55                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 335.2


                                      paper pour solution  (5.4.3.2.2)
                                      collecting the filtrate in the saae
                                      container as filtrate from (5.4.3.2.1).
                                      Mix until the filtrates are
                                      homogeneous.  The mixed reagent
                                      develops a pink color but this does not
                                      affect the color production with
                                      cyanide if used within 24 hours of
                                      preparation.

5.5   Semi-Automated Spec trophotome trie Reagents

      5.5.1    Chloramine-T  solution:  Dissolve 0.40 g of chloramine-T in ASTM
               Type  I water  and dilute to 100 mL.  Prepare fresh daily.

      5.5.2    Phosphate buffer:  Dissolve 138 g of N«H2PO4.H20 in ASTM Type  I
               water and dilute Co 1 liter.   Add 0.5 mL of Brij-35 (available
               from Technicon).  Store at 4*C(+2*C).

      5.5.3    Pyridine-barbituric acid solution:  Transfer 15 g of barbituric
               acid into a 1 liter volumetric flask. Add about 100 mL of ASTM
              Type I water and swirl the flask.  Add 74 mL of pyridine and
              mix.  Add 15 mL of concentrated HC1 and mix.   Dilute to about
              900 mL with ASTM Type I water and mix until the barbituric acid
               is dissolved.   Dilute to 1 liter with ASTM Type I water.  Store
              at 4*C(±2-C).

      5.5.4    Sampler wash:   Dissolve 10 g of NaOH in ASTM Type I water and
               dilute to 1 liter.

6.    PROCEDURE

6.1   Manual Spectrophotometric Determination  (Option  B)

      6.1.1   Withdraw 50 mL or less of the solution from the flask and
               transfer to a 100 mL volumetric flask. If less than 50 mL is
               taken, dilute to 50 mL with 0.25 H sodium hydroxide solution.
              Add 15.0 mL of sodium phosphate solution and mix.

               6.1.1.1    Pyridine-barbituric acid method:  Add 2 mL of
                         chloraaine-T and mix.  After 1 to 2 minutes, add 5
                         mL of pyridine-barbituric acid solution and mix.
                         Dilute to mark with ASTM Type I water and mix again.
                         Allow 8 minutes for color development then read
                         absorbance at 578 nm in a 1 cm cell within 15
                         minutes.

               6.1.1.2    Pyridine-pyrazolone method:  Add 0.5 mL of
                         chloramine-T and mix.  After 1 to 2 minutes, add 5
                         mL of pyridine-pyrazolone solution and mix.  Dilute
                         to mark with ASTM Type 1 water and mix again. After
                         40 minutes, read absorbance  at 620 nm in a 1 cm
                                   D-56                                10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit D Method 335.2


                          cell.   NOTE:  More than 0.5 mL of chloramine-T will
                          prevent the color from developing with pyridine-
                          pyrazolone.

       6.1.2    Prepare a minimum of 3 standards and a blank by pipetting
               suitable volumes  of standard solution into 250 mL volumetric
               flasks.  MOTE:  One calibration standard must be at  the
               Contract Required Detection Limit (CRDL).   To each standard,
               add 50 mL of 1.25 N sodium hydroxide and dilute to 250 mL with
               ASTM Type I water.   Standards must bracket the concentration of
               the samples.   If  dilution is required,  use the blank solution.
               As an example,  standard solutions could be prepared  as follows:

               mL of Standard  Solution      Cone,  ug ON
                   (1.0 - 5  uy CN>           per 250 mL

                         0                    Blank
                       1.0                      5
                       2.0                     10
                       5.0                     25
                      10.0                     50
                      15.0                     75
                      20.0                    100

               6.1.2.1     It is not imperative that all standards be distilled
                          in the same manner as the samples.  At lease one
                          standard (mid-range) must be distilled and compared
                          to similar values on the curve to ensure that the
                          distillation technique is reliable. If the distilled
                         standard does not agree within ±15% of the
                         undistilled standards, the operator should find and
                         correct the cause of the apparent error before
                         proceeding.

               6.1.2.2    Prepare a standard curve by plotting absorbance of
                         standard vs. cyanide concentrations  (per 2SO mL).

6.2   Semi-Automated Spectrophotometric Determination (Option C)

      6.2.1    Set up  the manifold.  Pump  the  reagents through the  system
               until a steady  baseline is  obtained.

      6.2.2    Calibration standards:   Prepare a blank and at  least  three
               calibration standards over  the  range of the analysis.  One
               calibration standard must be at the CRDL.   For  a working  range
               of 0-200 ug/L,  the  following standards may be  used:
                                   D-57                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 33S.2

               mL Standard Solution        Concentration
                diluted to 1 liter            ug CN/L

                          0                     0
                        4.0                    20
                       10.0                    SO
                       20.0                   100
                       30.0                   ISO
                       40.0                   200

               Add 10 g of NaOH to each standard.   Store  at 4*C(±2*C)

      6.2.3    Place  calibration standards, blanks, and control standards in
               the  sampler tray,  followed by distilled samples, distilled
               duplicates,  distilled standards,  distilled spikes, and
               distilled blanks.

      6.2.4    When a steady reagent baseline is obtained and before starting
               the  sampler, adjust  the baseline using  the  appropriate knob on
               the  colorimeter. Aspirate a calibration standard and adjust the
               STD  GAL dial on  the  colorimeter until the desired signal  is
               obtained.  Record  the STD CAL value.  Re-establish the baseline
               and  proceed  to analyze calibration standards, blanks, control
               standards, distilled samples, and distilled QC audits.

7.    CALCTJLATIOHS

7.1   If the semi-automated method is  used, measure the peak heights of the
      calibration standards (visually  or using a data system) and calculate a
      linear regression equation. Apply the equation  to the samples and QC
      audits to determine the cyanide  concentration in the distillates. To
      determine the concentration of cyanide  in the original sample, MULTIPLY
      THE RESULTS BY ONE-HALF (since the original volume was 500 mL and the
      distillate volume was 250 mL).   Also, correct for any dilutions which
      were Bade before or after distillation.

7.2   If the colorimetric procedure is used,  calculate the cyanide, in ug/L,
      in the original sample as follows:

                   A x 1,000 mL/L     x
      CN. ug/L -	


      Where:   A -  ug CN read from  standard curve  (per 250 mL
               B -  mL of original sample for.distillation
               C -  mL taken for colorimetric analysis
               50 mL - volume of  original sample aliquot
               1,000 oL -  conversion mL to  L

7.3   Appropriate  concentration units  must be  specified  on the required
      forms.   The  quantitative values  shall be reported  in units of
      micrograms per  liter (ug/L)  for  aqueous  samples, NO other  units are
      acceptable.     .  '.  .    ''...•
                                    D-58                                10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit D Method 335.2


7.4    If  dilutions  were performed,  the  appropriate  corrections mast be
       applied to  the sample  values.

8.     QUALITY CONTROL

8.1    Quality control must be performed as specified  in Exhibit E.

8.2    All quality control (QC) data must be submitted with each data package
       as specified  in Exhibit B.

9.     BtfBRKffCZS

9.1  Interim Methods  for the Sampling and Analysis of Priority Pollutants in
     Sediments and Fish Tissue," USEPA Environmental Monitoring and Support
     Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  Ohio, August 1977, Revised October 1980.

9.2  Methods for "Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes',  March 1979.  EPA
     publication *600/4-79-02.

9.3  Op.  cit. (#4),  Methods  335.2.

9.4  "Operation RN Manual for Technicon  Auto Analyzer IIC  System*,  1980.
     Technical publication #TA9-0460-00. Technicon Industrial Systems,
     Tarrytown, NY,  10591.

9.5  "Users Guide  for the Continuous Flow Analyzer Automation System",  EMSL
     U.S.  EPA, Cincinnati, OH (1981).
                                    D-59                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit 0 We nod 300.0


                                    PART H
                    ION CHROKATOGRAPHY METHOD  FOR H02/NO3-H


1.    SCOPE ASP APPLICATION

1.1   This method is applicable to the detemination of N02/NOj-N in  low
      concentration water samples.

1.2   The range of the method nay be varied through instrument and/or sample
      size.  Using a 100 uL sample size,  a detection limit of 10 ug/L for
      N02/N03-N can be achieved.

1.3   This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
      analysts experienced in the use of ion chromatography  and in the
      interpretation of the resulting ion chromatogram.

2.    SUMMARY OF METHOD

2.1   A small volume of sample,  typically 0.1  -  1.0 mL, is introduced into an
      ion chroma tograph.   The anions of interest are separated  and measured
      using a system comprised of a guard column,  separator  column,
      suppressor column,  and conductivity detector.
3.
3 . 1   Interferences can be caused by substances with retention times  that are
      similar to and overlap those of the  anion of interest.   Large amounts
      of an anion can interfere with the peak resolution of an adjacent
      anion.  If it is determined that this  type of interference  cannot be
      resolved, N02/N03-N must be determined by using the color ime trie method
      specified in Part I.

3.Z   Method interferences may be caused by  contaminants in the reagent
      water, reagents, glassware, and other  sample processing apparatus that
      lead to discrete artifacts or elevated baseline in ion  chromatograms .

3.3   Samples that contain particles larger  than 0.45 microns and reagent
      solutions that contain particles larger than 0.20 microns require
      filtration to prevent damage to instrument columns and flow systems.

3.4   The use of concentrated sulfuric acid, in the preservation of the
      sample, can cause possible instrument interference problems in the
      analysis of the target analyte.  The analyst should be aware of the
      type of preservative used and take  the appropriate action,  if
      necessary.  Sulfuric acid must be neutralized before proceeding with
      the analysis.

4.    APPARATUS

4.1   Ion chroma to graph:  Any analytical system complete  with  ion
      chromato graph and all  required accessories  including analytical
      columns,  detector,  stripchart recorder and  a  data  system for peak
      integration.

                                    D-60                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 300.0


      4.1.1   Anion  guard  column: 4 x  50mm.

      4.1.2   Anion  separator column:  4 x 250nm.

      4.1.3   Anion  suppressor column: fiber, or equivalent.

      4.1.4   Detector: Conductivity cell, approximately 6 ul volume.

4.2   Operational Requirements

      4.2.1   Because of the differences between various makes and models of
              satisfactory instruments, no detailed operating instructions
              can be provided.  Instead, the analyst should follow the
              instructions provided by the manufacturer of die particular
              instrument.  Other columns,  chromatographic conditions, or
              detectors may be used if the QA requirements in Exhibit E are
              met.  Sensitivity,  instrumental detection limits, precision,
              retention time and other column chromatographic conditions must
              be investigated and established for iK>2/NO3-N on that
              particular instrument.

              IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF  THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE
              INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
              THE ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS  SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO
              MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL DATA CONFIRMING INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE
              AND ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

              The data must include hardcopies or computer  readable  storage
              media which can be readily examined by an audit team.   The data
              must demonstrate defendable  choices of instrument operating
              conditions which minimize interferences such  as sulfide co-
              elution.

5.    BEAgBBTS AND STANDARJ?

5.1   Reagent water:   ASTH  Type I water, free  of  anions of  interest  and
      containing no particles  larger than 0.20 microns.

5.2   Eluent solution:   Sodium bicarbonate 0.003  K,  sodium  carbonate 0.0024
      M.   Dissolve 1.0081 g sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) and 1.0176 g of
      sodium carbonate (Na2CO;j)  in  reagent water  and dilute to 4 liters.

      5.2.1   Eluent spiking solution:  sodium bicarbonate 0.030 M,  sodium
              carbonate 0.0240 M.  Dissolve 2.5203 g sodium bicarbonate
              (NaHCO3) and 2.5440 g of sodium carbonate (NA2CC>3) in reagent
              water and dilute to 1 liter.

5.3   Regeneration solution (fiber  suppressor, or equivalent):  Sulfuric acid
      0.025 N.  Dilute 8 mL cone, sulfuric acid (H^SO/^) to 4 liters with
      reagent water.

5.4   Stock standards, 1000 mg/L:  Stock standard solutions may be purchased
      as certified solutions  or prepared from ACS reagent grade materials
      (dried at 105*C for 30  minutes)  as listed below.

                                   D-61                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit 0 Method  300.0


      5.4.1    N02/N03-N 1000  mg/L:   dissolve 6.0679  g of sodium nitrate
               (NaN03)  and 4.9257  g  sodium  nitrite  (NaNO2)  in reagent  water
               and dilute to 1 liter.
6.1   Establish a stable baseline with working eluent running through the
      system and establish ion chromatographic operating parameters
      equivalent to obtain the CRDL's.   This requires at least 30 minutes.

6.2   Calibration and Sample Analysis

      6.2.1   Matrix matching, with the samples, is mandatory for all blanks,
              standards, and quality to control samples to avoid inaccurate
              concentration values due to possible standard curve deviation.

      6.2.2   For N02/M03-N, prepare a combined calibration standard at a
              minimum of three concentration levels and a blank by adding
              accurately measured volumes of the stock standards to a
              volumetric flask and diluting to volume with reagent water.
              One of the standards must be at the CRDL.   The attenuator range
              settings must be linear.

      6.2.3    Using injections of 0.1 to 1.0 mL (determined by injection loop
              volume) of each calibration standard,  tabulate peak height or
              area responses against the concentration.   The results are used
              to prepare a calibration curve for each analyte.   During this
              procedure, retention times must be recorded.

      6.2.4    The working calibration curve must be  prepared daily and
              whenever the anion eluent is changed and after every 20 samples
              whichever is most frequent.   If the response for any analyte
              varies from the expected values by more than ±10%, the test
              must be repeated,  using fresh calibration standards.  If the
              results are still more than ±10%,  an entire new calibration
              must be prepared for that analyte.  Nonlinear response can
              result when the separator column capacity is exceeded
              (overloading).   Maximum loading (all anions) should not exceed
              400 ppm.

      6.2.5    The width of the retention time window used to make
              identifications must be based upon measurements of actual
              retention time variations of standards run over three non-
              consecutive days.   Three times the standard deviation will be
              used to calculate the retention time windows.  The retention
              time for N02/N03-M must be within the retention time window
              established during the most recent initial calibration.  A.
              retention time window of 1% of the average retention time of
              the three standards must be used if the computed one is less
              Chan 1% of that average.
                                   D-62                                10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit 0 Method  300.0


       6.2.6   Load and inject a fixed amount of sample, using the same size
               loop for standards and samples.   Flush the injection loop
               thoroughly, using each new sample.   Record the resulting peak
               size in area or peak height units.   An automated sampler system
               may be used.

       6.2.7   If the response for the peak exceeds the linear range of the
               system, dilute the sample with an appropriate  amount of reagent
               water (but not below the CRDL) and reanalyze.

 7.     CALCULATIONS

 7.1    Prepare separate calibration curves for N02/N03-N by plotting peak size
       in area, or peak height units of standards against concentration.
      Compute sample concentration by comparing sample peak response with the
      standard curve.

7.2   If dilutions were performed, the appropriate  factor must be applied to
      sample values.

7.3   Appropriate concentration units must be specified on the required
      forms.  The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micrograos per liter (ug/L) for aqueous samples.  NO other units are
      acceptable.

8.    OTAIJT* COaTTML

8.1   Quality control must be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

8.2   All quality control (QC) data must be submitted with each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.

8.3   Reportable data for a sample must include a chromatogram with retention
      times within the retention time windows established during the most
      recent initial calibration.  If identification of specific anions is
      questionable, the samples must be reanalyzed  by other methods listed
      within this contract.
                                    D-63                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Methou  253.2


                                    PART I
       AUTOMATED COLORIMETRIC METHODS  FOR THE DETERMINATION OF B02/NO3-N


 1.     SCOPE AND APPLICATIfHf

 1.1    This method  is applicable to the determination of 1K>2/NO3-N in low
       concentration water samples.

 1.2    The range of this method is 50 to 10000 ug/L K02/N03-N.

 2.     STP«*m»T OF METHOD

 2.1   A filtered sample is passed through a column containing granulated
      copper-cadmium to reduce nitrate to nitrite.  The nitrite (that
      originally present plus reduced nitrate) is determined by diazotizing
      with sulfanilamide and coupling with N-(l-naphthyl)-ethylenediamine
      dihydrochloride to form a highly colored azo dye which is measured
      colorimetrically.
3.
3.1   Build up of suspended matter in the reduction column will restrict
      sample flow.

3.2   Low results might be obtained for samples that contain high
      concentrations of iron,  copper or other metals.  EDTA is added to the
      saaples to eliminate this interference.

3.3   Samples that contain large concentrations of oil and grease will coat
      the surface of the cadmium.  This interference can be eliminated by
      pre-extracting the sample with an organic solvent.
4.

4.1   Auto analyzer system with the following components:

      4.1.1   Sampler.

      4.1.2   Proportioning pump.

      4.1.3   Nitrate-nitrite  analytical cartridge.

      4.1.4   Chart  recorder .

      4.1.5   Colorimeter with 50  mm tubular flow cell and 540 mm filter.

4.2   Operational Requirements

      4.2.1    System Configuration -- Because of the differences between
              various makes  and models of satisfactory instruments, no
               detailed operating instructions can be provided.  Instead, the
               analyst should follow the instructions provided by the
               manufacturer of that particular instrument.  Sensitivity,

                                    D-64                                 10/9i

-------
                                                       Exhibit 0 Method 353.2


               instrumental detection limit,  precision,  linear dynamic range,
               and  interference effects must be investigated and established
               for  -itrate  and nitrice on thar. particular instrument.

               IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE
               INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
               THE  ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH M THIS METHOD AND TO
               MAINTAIN QDALITT CONTROL DATA CONFIRMIIIC INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE
               ARD  ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

5.    MACElfTS AMD STANDARDS

S.I   Granulated cadad.ua:  40-60 mesh.

5.2   Copper-cadaiua:  The  eadaiua granules (new or used) are cleaned with
      dilute HC1 and copperized with 2% solution of copper sulfaCe in the
      following aanner:

      5.2.1    Wash the eadaiua with 6N HC1 and rinse with ASTM Type I water.
               The color of the eadaiua so treated should be silver.

      5.2.2    Swirl lOg eadaiua in 100 aL portions of 2% solution of copper
               sulfate for five ainutes or until blue color partially fades,
               decant, and repeat with fresh copper sulfate until a brown
               colloidal precipitate foras.

      5.2.3   Wash the cadaiua-copper with ASTM Type I water (at least ten
               tines) to reaove all precipitated copper.  The color of the
               eadaiua so treated should be black.

5.3   Color reagent:  To  approximately 800 mL of ASTM Type I water,  add,  while
      stirring, 100 aL cone, phosphoric acid, 40g sulfanilaaide, and 2g N-l-
      naphthylethylenediaaine dihydrochloride.  Stir until dissolved and
      dilute to one liter.   Store in brown bottle and keep in the dark when
      not in use.  This solution is stable for several months.

5.4   Dilute hydrochloric acid, 6N: Dilute 50 aL cone. HC1 to 100 aL with
      ASTM Type I water.

5.5   Copper sulfate solution, 2%: Dissolve 20g of CuSO^-l^O in 500 aL of
      ASTM Type I water and dilute to one liter.

5.6   Ammonium chloride-EDTA solution: Dissolve 85g of reagent  grade  ammonium
      chloride and O.lg of disodium ethylenediaaine tetracetate in 900 mL of
      ASTM Type I water.  Adjust the pH to 8.5 with cone,  amaoniua hydroxide
      and dilute to one liter.  Add 1/2 mL of a surfactant.

5.7   Stock standard solutions.  1000 mg/L (Img/mL):  Stock standard solutions
      may be purchased as  certified solutions  or  prepared from ACS reagent
      grade aaterials (dried at 105*C  for 30 min.)  as listed below.

      5.7.1    Nitrate (N03-N) 1000 mg/L:  Dissolve 6.0679g sodium nitrate
                       in  ASTM Type I water and dilute to one liter.
                                   D-65                                 10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 353.2


 6.     PROCEDURE

 6.1    Calibration and Sample Analysis

       6.1.1    Matrix matching, with  the saaples.  is mandatory for all blanks,
               standards,  and quality control saaples  to avoid inaccurate
               concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

       6.1.2    Set up the  manifold.   Pump the reagents through the system
               until a steady baseline is obtained.

       6.1.3    Prepare a blank and at  least three standards over the suspected
               range of  analysis.  One calibration standard oust be at the
               CRDL.

       6.1.4    Saaples oust be neutralized (if the pH is below 5, froa
               sulfuric  acid preservation,  or above 9) prior to analysis using
               either concentrated HC1 or NH^OH.  The saaples,  standards, all
               QC samples, and dilution water oust be matrix matched.

      6.1.5    Place calibration standards,  blanks, and quality control
               standards in the sampler tray,  followed by samples.

      6.1.6   When a steady baseline is obtained and before starting the
               sampler,  adjust the baseline,  using the coloriaeter,  to zero.
              Aspirate a calibration standard and adjust the coloriaeter
               until the desired maximum signal is obtained. Re-establish the
              baseline  and proceed to analyze the calibration  standards,
               blanks, quality control standards, and samples.

      6.1.7    Prepare standard curve by plotting absorbance peak heights of
               processed standards against known concentrations.  The curve
               must have a correlation coefficient greater than or  equal to
               0.99S.  If the correlation coefficient is less than 0.995, the
               analysis must be repeated.

      6.1.8    Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more concentrated than
               the linear range for an analyte.

7.
7.1   Compute concentration of samples  by comparing sample peak heights with
      standard curve.

7.2   If dilutions were performed,  Che appropriate factor must be applied to
      saaple values.

7.3  .Appropriate concentration units must be specified on the required
      forms.  The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micrograms per liter  (ug/L) for aqueous samples, NO other units are
      acceptable.
                                   D-66                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 353.2
              COHTROL
8.1   Quality control oust be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

8.2   All quality control (QC) data must be, submits   '.th each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.
                                   D-67                                 10/91

-------
                                                        Exhibit D Method 340.2


                                     PART J
        ION SELECTIVE ELECTRODE METHOD FOR THE DETERMTHATIOH OF FLUORIDE
 1.     SCOPE AJD
 1.1   This method is applicable to the measurement of fluoride in low
       concentration water samples.

 1.2   The range  of the method is 0.1 to 1000 mg/L of fluoride.

 1.3   This method may not measure total fluoride.

 2.     SUMMARY OF METHOD

 2.1    The  fluoride  is determined potentiometrically using a fluoride
       electrode  in  conjunction with a standard single junction sleeve -type
       reference  electrode and a potentiometric meter having an expanded
      millivolt  scale.

2.2   The  fluoride  electrode consists of a lanthanum fluoride  crystal across
      which a potential is developed by fluoride  ions.

3.     Aff rmr BMP* :Bt>

3.1   Extremes of pH  interference;  sample pH should be between S  and 9.
      Polyvalent cations of Silicon,  Iron,  and Aluminum  interfere by forming
      complexes with  fluoride.   The degree of interference depends upon the
      concentration of the complexing cations,  the  concentration  of  fluoride
      and  the pH of the sample.  The  addition of  a  pH S.O buffer  containing a
      strong chelating agent preferentially complexes aluminum (the  most
      common interference), silicon and iron. and  eliminates the pH problem.
4.

4.1   Selective ion meter

4.2   Fluoride Ion Activity Electrode

4.3   Reference electrode, single junction, sleeve type.

4.4   Magnetic stirrer, teflon coated stirring bar

4.5   Operational Requirements

      4.5.1    System Configuration  -- Because of  the  differences between
               various makes  and  models  of  satisfactory instruments,  no
               detailed instructions can be provided.   Instead,  the analyst
               should follow  the  instructions  provided by the manufacturer of
               the  particular instrument.  Sensitivity, instrumental detection
               limit,  precision,  linear  dynamic  range, and interference
               effects must be investigated and established for fluoride on
               that particular instrument.


                                    D-68                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit D Method 340.2


               IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ANALYST TO VERIFY THAT THE
               INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING CONDITIONS USED SATISFY
               THE ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THIS METHOD AND TO
               MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL DATA CONFIRXING INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE
               AND ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

5 _     BEACEPTS AND STANDARDS

5.1   Buffer solution,  pH 5.0 -  5.'5:  To  approximately 500 nL of distilled
      water in a 1 liter  beaker  add 57 mL of glacial acetic acid,  58 g of
      sodium chloride and 4g of  CDTA (1,2-cyclohexylene dinitrilo tetraacetic
      acid).   Stir to dissolve and cool to room temperature.   Adjust pH of
      solution to between 5.0 and 5.5 with 5 N sodiu» hydroxide (ABOUT 150 ML
      WILL BE REQUIRED).   Transfer solution to a 1 liter volumetric flask and
      dilute to nark with ASTM Type I water.

5.2   Fluoride (F*)  stock solution, 100 mg/L:  Dissolve .2210g of sodium
      fluoride in ASTM Type I water and dilute to 1 liter.

5.3   Sodium hydroxide, 5  N:  Dissolve 200g sodium hydroxide in ASTM Type I
      water,  cool and dilute  to  1 liter.

6.     PROCEDURE;

6.1   Calibration and Sample  Analysis

      6.1.1   Matrix matching, with  the samples, is mandatory  for all blanks,
               standards,  and quality control samples to avoid  inaccurate
               concentration values due to possible standard curve deviations.

      6.1.2    Prepare at least four  standards using the fluoride stock
               solution.  The standards must be at  the following
               concentrations: .1 mg/L, 1.0 mg/L, 2.0 mg/L, and at the CRDL.
               A blank standard does  not need  to  be part of the calibration
               curve  since  the log  of zero  is undefined.  However, a blank
               standard must be run immediately after calibration and  it must
               yield a concentration value  of  less  than 0.1 mg/L.

      6.1.3    Place 50 mL  of sample  or standard  solution  and 50 mL of buffer
               in a.  150 mL  beaker.   Place  on a magnetic  stirrer and mix at
               medium speed.   Immerse the  electrodes  in  solution and observe
               the meter reading  while mixing.  The electrodes must remain in
               solution for at least  three  minutes.   Once  the meter has
               stabilized,  a  reading may be obtained.   At concentrations under
               0.5 mg/L F,  it  may require  five minutes or more to reach a
               stable meter reading.

      6.1.&    Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more concentrated than
               the linear  range  for an analyte.
                                    D-69                                10/91

-------
                                                       Exhibit 0 Method 340.2
7.    CALCTIATIOHS
7.1   Using semi logarithmic graph paper, plot che concentration of fluoride
      in ug/L on che log axis vs. che electrode potential developed in Che
      standard on che linear axis, starting with the lowest concentration at
      che bottom of the scale.  If the instrument has the capability,
      fluoride concentracion nay be read directly fro* the meter.
7.2   If dilutions were performed, the appropriate factor Bust be applied to
      the sample value.

7.3   Appropriate concentration units must be specified on the required
      forms.  The quantitative values shall be reported in units of
      micrograms per liter (ug/L) for aqueous samples, MO other units are
      acceptable.
8.1   Quality control must be performed as specified in Exhibit E.

8.2   All quality control (QC)  data must be submitted with each data package
      as specified in Exhibit B.
                                    D-70                                10/91

-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
                                                        10/91

-------
 This section outlines the «inimum QA/QC operations necessary to satisfy the
 analytical requirements of the contract.  The following QA/QC operations oust
 be performed as described in this Exhibit:

      1.    ICP/HS Tuning; and  Mas* uiiibration
      2.    Retention Time Window for  Ion  Chronatography

      3.    Instrunent Calibration
      4.    Initial Calibration Verification (ICV) and Continuing Calibration
           Verification (CCV)

      5.    CRDL Standards (CRI)
      6.   Linear Range Standard Analysis (LRS)

      7.   Initial Calibration Blank (ICB),  Continuing Calibration Blank (CCB),
          and Preparation Blank (PB)  Analyses

     8.   ICP and ICP/MS  Interference Check Saaple  (ICS) Analyses

     9.   Matrix Spike  Saaple  Analysis (S)

     10.   Duplicate Sample Analysis (D)

     11.   Laboratory Control Saaple (LCS) Analysis
     12.   Performance Evaluation Saaple (PES)

     13.   Serial Dilution Analysis (L)
     14.   Internal Standards for ICP/MS

     IS.   Instrument Detection Limit  (IDL) Determination

     16.   Intereleaent  Corrections for ICP and ICP/MS

     17.   Hydride ICP (HYICP)  and Furnace AA QC Analysis


1.    ICP/MS TUBUHG AHD MASS  CALIBRATION

1.1   Guidelines for mass calibration and tuning are given in Exhibit D.
      Resolution and mass calibration oust be  performed for each ICP/MS
      system, each time the instrument is set  up. The resolution and Bass
      calibration oust be verified immediately before instrument calibration.
      The resolution and mass calibration must also be verified at the end of
      each analytical  run, or every eight hours, which ever is more frequent.
      The tuning solution must be analyzed after the final CCV/CCB in the
      run.  The  mass calibration and  tuning times as well as their
      verification tines  must be included in the raw data.

      A 100 ppb  solution of elements  Li,  Co, In, and Tl must be used as a
      tuning verification solution.   The intensities and isotopic ratios of
      the tuning criteria are as recommended in Table VIII, Exhibit C.  The
      resolution and mass calibration criteria must be within the control
      limits in Table  VIII, Exhibit C.  If not, the analysis must be
      terminated,  the  problem corrected and all measurements taken by  the
      instrument since the  last compliant mass calibration and resolution
      check must be reperformed in a  new analytical run.
                                   E-l                                 10/91

-------
1.2   The values for Che initial and subsequent mass calibrations and
      resolution cheek shall be recorded on Fora XIV -  LCIN for ICF/MS
      analyses, as indicated in Exhibit B.

2.    RETENTION TIME glHPQg FOR ION CHROMATOCRAPH^

2.1   Retention tine windows for all analytes analyzed using Ion
      Chroma tography (1C) must be established prior to  any sample analysis
      and each tine a new column is installed.  The width of the retention
      tine window used to establish identification Bust be based upon
      measurement of actual retention times of standards run over three non-
      consecutive days.   The concentration of each standard oust be
      sufficient to produce a response for each analyte that is approximately
      half scale.   Three times the standard deviation of the retention time
      of the standards shall be used to calculate the retention time windows
      for each analyte.   A retention time window of 1%  of the average
      retention time of the three standards must be used if the computed one
      is less than 1% of that average.

      The retention time window must be individually determined for each
      analysis run by measuring the retention time  of the calibration
      standard near the  aid range of the calibration curve for that run and
      making that retention time the center of the  established retention time
      window (see Exhibit B) .   The retention time of each measured value for
      each analyte  must  be within the retention time window established
      during the most recent instrument calibration for that analyte.   If
      not,  the analysis  must be stopped,  the problem corrected,  the
      instrument recalibrated,  new retention time windows determined,  and the
      samples analyzed since the last compliant CCV must be reanalyzed in a
      new run.

      Retention times must be calculated and reported for each measurement
      taken for each analyte analyzed by 1C.

2.2   The values for the retention time and retention time windows must be
      reported on Form XVII - LCIN for all analytes analyzed by 1C systems ,
      as indicated in Exhibit B.

3.    IMSTMMaiT CALIBRATION
3.1   Guidelines for instrumental calibration are given in EPA 600/4-79-0201
      and/or Exhibit 0.  Instruments must be calibrated daily or once every
      24 hours (8 hours for ICP/MS) and each time the instrument is set up.
      The instrument standardization date and time must be reported in the
      raw data.

      Calibration standards must be prepared by diluting  the stock solutions
      at the time of analysis, and be discarded after use.  The date and  time
      of preparation and analysis of the standards must be reported in the
      raw data.

      The calibration standards must be prepared using  the same type of
      matrix and at the same concentration  as  in the preparation blank
      following preparation.  Aspirate, inject, or immerse the electrodes in


                                    E-2                                10/91

-------
       the calibration solutions as described in the individual Methods (see
       Exhibit D) , and record the readings for each analyte at each
       wavelength, mass, detector configuration, and potential  used for
       analysis in the SDG.

       Calibrate all systems according to the instrument manufacturer's
       recommended procedures or as specified in Exhibit D.  At least one
      blank and a standard must be used for ICP, HYICP, and ICP/MS systems.
      All other systems must have a calibration standard at the CRDL,  a
      blank, and at least two other standards.  Systems that use non- linear
      calibration curves must use at least three additional standards  which
      cover both the upper and lower ranges of the curve.

      All calibration curves must have a correlation coefficient of 0.9950 or
      greater before any analysis may be started.   The correlation
      coefficient for each calibration curve must be clearly documented and
      must be submitted with the raw data.

3 . 2   Baseline correction is acceptable as long as it is performed after each
      and every sample,  or after the continuing calibration verification and
      blank check.
4     IHITIAL CALIBRATTOfl V^mCATIOH (ICV^  AND COBTIHUIHC CAUBRATIOH
                   (CCV)
4.1   Initial Calibration Verification (ICV)

      4.1.1   Immediately after each of the analysis systems have been
              calibrated, the accuracy of the  initial calibration must be
              verified and documented for each and every analyte by the
              analysis of Initial  Calibration  Verification Solution(s) .  When
              resulting measurements exceed the control limits of Table III-
              Initial  and Continuing Calibration Verification and CRDL
              Standard Control Limits for Inorganic Analyses (see Exhibit C),
              the  analysis must be terminated, the problem corrected, the
              instrument recalibrated, and  the calibration reverified.

      4.1.2   If the Initial Calibration Verification Solution(s) are not
              provided, or where a certified solution of an analyte  is not
              available from any source, analyses must be conducted  on an
              independent standard at a concentration other than that used
              for  regular instrument calibration, but within the calibration
              range.  An independent standard  is defined as a  standard
              composed of the  analytes  from a.  different source than  those
              used in  the standards for  the instrument calibration.

      4.1.3   For  ICP, HYICP.  ICP/MS  and AA the  Initial Calibration
              Verification  Solution(s)  oust be run and reported at each
              wavelength and elemental  expression used for analysis.  For
               cyanide, the  initial calibration verification standard must be
              distilled.   The Initial Calibration Verification for cyanide
               serves as  a Laboratory Control Sample;  thus  it must be
               distilled .with the batch of samples  analyzed in  association
                         *   .    •. . •
                                    E-3                                10/91

-------
              with that ICV.  This means that an ICV must be distilled with
              each batch of samples analyzed and that the samples distilled
              with an ICV must be analyzed with that particular ICV.

4.2   Continuing Calibration Verification (CCV)

      4.2.1   To ensure calibration accuracy during each analysis run, one of
              the following standards is to be used for continuing
              calibration verification and must be analyzed and reported for
              each analyte, at a frequency of 10% or every 2 hours during an
              analysis run, whichever is more frequent.  The standard
              solution must also be analyzed at the beginning of the run and
              after the last analytical sample.

      4.2.2   If more than one wavelength or elemental expression is used to
              produce results for an analyte,  the continuing calibration
              verification must be analyzed and reported for every wavelength
              and elemental expression used to produce results for that
              analyte in the SDG.

      4.2.3   The analyte concentrations in the continuing calibration
              standard must be one of the following solutions at or near
              (±10%)  the mid-range levels of the calibration curve:

              1. Provided  solutions
              2. A Contractor ^prepared  standard solution
              The same continuing calibration standard must be used
              throughout the analysis runs for an SDG received.

      4.2.4   Each CCV analyzed most reflect the conditions of analysis of
              all associated analytical samples (the preceding 10 analytical
              samples or the preceding analytical samples to the previous
              CCV).  The duration of analysis. rinses and other related
              operations that may affect the CCV measured result may not be
              applied to the CCV to a greater extent than the extent applied
              to the associated analytical samples.  For instance, the
              difference in time between a CCV analysis and the blank
              immediately  following it, as well as the difference in time
              between the  CCV and the analytical sample immediately preceding
              it. may not  exceed the smallest difference in time between any
              two consecutive analytical samples associated with the CCV.

      4.2.S   If the deviation of the continuing calibration verification  is
              greater than the control  limits specified in Table 111  in
              Exhibit C. the  analysis must be terminated,  the  problem
              corrected and the  CCV  reanalyzed  only once.   If the  first
              reanalysis yields  a CCV value within control limits,  then the
              preceding 10 analytical  samples or all analytical samples
              analyzed since the last  compliant calibration verification may
              be reanalyzed for the  analytes  affected.  Otherwise the
               instrument must be recalibrated,  the calibration verified and
               the affected analytical  samples rerun in the context of a new
               run.   If the affected analytical sample is an instrument
                                    E-4                                 10/91

-------
               related QC sample  such  as  ICS,  CRI,  or LRS,  then the correction
               to the  problem and reanalysis  of  the standards must  be  done
               immediately within the  8 hour  limit  for those standards.   If
               not,  reanalysis of all  samples  and QC samples in the run  is
               required.

      4.2.6    Each  analytical sample  must be  preceded by a CCV.  As many as
               ten (10) analytical samples may be analyzed before a subsequent
               CCV is  required.   However, the  CCV must be reanalyzed within
               two (2)  hours.   The values for  each  analyte in the two  CCVs
               must  be  within the control limits.

4.3   The values for the initial and subsequent continuing calibration
      verification must be recorded on Form II - LCIN for all  analysis
      systems,  as indicated in Exhibit B.

5.    9RJL STAHDABP (CRI)

5.1   To verify linearity near the  IDL for  all analysis systems, the
      Contractor must analyze a standard at two  times the CROL at the
      beginning and end of each sample analysis  run, or a minimum of twice
      per 8 consecutive hours, whichever is more frequent, but  not before
      Initial Calibration Verification.   The  CRI standard must  be run  for
      each analyte at every wavelength and  elemental expression used for
      analysis .

5.2   All results for the analysis  of the CRDL standard must fall within the
      control limits specified in Table III in Exhibit C for each analyte at
      every wavelength and elemental expression used for analysis.   If not,
      the analysis must be terminated, the  problem corrected and all
      analytical samples since the  last compliant CRI reanalyzed.

5.3   The values for Che initial and subsequent CRDL standards must be
      recorded  on Font III • LCIN for all analysis  systems,  as indicated in
      Exhibit B.
6.    LIHEAR. *Ajyyy AHALTSIS STAHPABJ ftf ?)

6.1   To verify the upper limit of the linear range of all analysis systems,
      the Contractor must analyze a standard at the upper limit of the linear
      range of ICF. HYICP. and ICP/MS systems and at the concentration of the
      highest calibration standard for all other analysis systems.  The
      linear range standard must be analyzed at the beginning and end of each
      sample analysis run, or a minimum of rwice per 8 consecutive hours,
      whichever is more frequent, but not before Initial Calibration
      Verification.  This standard must be run for each analyte at every
      wavelength or elemental expression used for analysis.

6.2   Results for the analysis of the .LRS must fall within the control  limits
      of ±10% of the true value for each analyte at every wavelength and
      elemental expression used for analysis.  If not,  the analysis must be
      terminated and successive dilutions of the standard must be  reanalyzed
      until the control limits are met.  The concentration of  this standard
                                    E-5                                10/91

-------
       that meets  the  control  limits  is  the  upper  limit of  the  instrument
       linear range beyond which results cannot be reported under this
       contract without dilution of the analytical sample.

 6.3       values  for  the initial and subsequent linear range standards  must
       be recorded on  Form IV  -  LCIN  for all analysis systems,  as indicated in
       Exhibit B.

 7.     INITIAL CALIBRATION VERIFICATION BLANK (ICB) . COHTIHDIBC 7ALIBRATION
                  I ITJUnt fCCll^   AMD  mmARATTOM MTJUir fVBA AHAT.TCITC
      Three  types of blanks are used for analysis.  The calibration blank is
      used in establishing and checking the calibration curve, the
      preparation blank is used to monitor for possible contamination
      resulting from the sample preparation procedure,  and the rinse blank
      (if appropriate) is used to flush the system between all samples and
      standards.

7.1   Initial Calibration Verification Blank (ICB) and  Continuing Calibration
      Verification Blank (CCB)  Analyses

      7.1.1   A calibration blank must be analyzed for each analyte at each
              wavelength and elemental expression used for analysis,
              immediately after each and every initial  and continuing
              calibration verification, linear range standard and memory test
              solution (MTS).  see Exhibit D (Part E) and Exhibit C (Table
              IX), at a frequency of 10% or every 2 hours during the run,
              whichever is more frequent.  The blank must be analyzed at the
              beginning of the run and after the last analytical sample.
              Note:  A CCB must be run after the last CCV that was run after
              the last analytical sample of the run.

      7.1.2   If more than one wavelength or elemental  expression instrument
              setting is used to produce results for an analyte, the Initial
              and Continuing Calibration blanks must be analyzed and reported
              for every wavelength and elemental expression used to produce
              results for that analyte in the SDG.

      7.1.3   If the magnitude (absolute value) of the calibration blank
              result exceeds the IDL, the result must be so reported on Form
              V - LCIN.  If the absolute value of the blank result exceeds
              the CRDL. analysis must be terminated, the problem corrected,
              the instrument recalibrated and the preceding 10 analytical
              samples or all analytical samples analyzed since the last
              compliant calibration blank must be reanalyzed.  The instrument
              oust be recalibrated, the calibration verified and the affected
              analytical samples rerun in the context of a new run.  If any
              of the affected analytical samples  are instrument related QC
              samples, such as ICS, CRI, LRS, or  MIS, then the correction to
              the problem and  reanalysis of the standards must be done
              immediately within the  8 hour limit for those standards.   If
              not, reanalysis  of all  samples  and  QC  in  the run  is required.
                                    E-6                                 10/91

-------
       7.1.4    Each analytical sample must  be  preceded by a calibration blank.
               As  many as ten (10)  analytical  samples may be analyzed before a
               subsequent CCB is  required.  However,  the  CCB must be
               reanalyzed within  two  (2) hours.   The  absolute value for each
               analyte in these two CCBs oust  fall  below  the CRDL.

               For ICP/MS systems,  the flush time between any of the samples
               in  a run cannot be less than the flush time between  the KTS  and
               the CCB that immediately follows it  in the memory test for that
               run.  For  all  other  analysis systems,  the  flush  time between
               any of  the samples in a run cannot be  less than  the  flush time
               between the LRS and  the CCB that immediately follows it in that
               run.

               For  all  analysis systems, flush time between any of  the samples
               in a QC  set cannot be less than the flush  time between the last
               sample and the final CCB of that same set.   A QC set  is  the set
               of analytical samples analyzed between two consecutive CCV/CCB
               sets.

              Dry burns for Graphite Furnace AA are included in the flush
              time.  Rinses and other similar activities  are also  included in
              the flush time for  the  purpose of this  rule.

7.2   Preparation  Blank (PB)  Analysis

      7.2.1   At least one preparation blank (or reagent  blank), consisting
              of ASTM Type I  water  processed through each sample preparation
              and analysis procedure  (See Exhibit D,  Section III),  must be
              prepared and analyzed with every Sample Delivery Group, or with
              each batch   of samples  prepared, whichever  is more frequent.

      7.2.2   If more than one preparation  blank for the  same method was
              required, then the  first batch of samples is to be associated
              with preparation blank one,  the second batch of samples with
              preparation blank two,  etc.   Each data package must contain the
              results of all the  preparation blank analyses associated with
              the samples in that SDG.

              The preparation blanks are to be reported  for each SDG and used
              in all analyses to  ascertain whether sample concentrations
              reflect contamination in the  following manner:

              1)  If the  absolute value  of  the concentration of the
                  preparation blank is less than or equal to the CRDL
                  (Exhibit C) , no correction of sample results  is  performed.

              2)  If any  analyte  concentration in the blank is above the
                  CRDL, the  lowest  concentration of that  analyte in  the
 A group of samples prepared at the same time.
                                   E-7                                 10/91

-------
                   associated samples oust be lOx che blank conc«n*jc«tion.
                   Otherwise, all saaples associated with che blank with che
                   analyte 's concentration less than lOx the blank
                   concentration and above the CRDL, oust be redigestec*  — 1
                   reanalyzed for that analyte.  The sample coticentratiuu- *a
                   not co be corrected for che blank value.

               3)   If an analyte concentration in Che blank is below  che
                   negative CRDL, Chen all samples associated with  Che  blank
                  with analyte concentration less Chan lOx CRDL must be
                   redigesced and reanalyzed.
      7.2.3    The  values  for che inicial and concinuing calibration  blanks as
               well as Che preparation blank must be recorded on Font V -  LCIN
               for  all analysis systems, as  indicaCed in Exhibit B.
8.    IQP AHP ICP/MS iinptyp^j[pcE CHEC            ?) AHALTSIS
8.1   To verify incerelemenc and background correction factors,  Che
      Contractor must analyze and report Che results for the ICP Interference
      Check Sample at che beginning and end of each, analysis run or a minimum
      of twice per 8 consecutive hours, whichever is more f requeue,  but not
      before Inicial Calibration Verification.  The ICP Interference Check
      Sample must be obtained from EMSL/LV if available and be analyzed
      according to che instructions supplied with the ICS.

      The Interference Check Sample consist of two solutions: Solution A and
      Solution AB.  Solution A consists of the interf erents , and Solution AB
      contains both che analytes and che interf erents .  An ICS analysis
      consists of analyzing both solutions consecutively (starting with
      Solution A) for all wavelengths and elemental expressions  used for each
      analyce reported by ICP and ICP/MS.

      The magnitude (absolute value) of the result of each non- interfering
      analyce for che analyses of Solution A for ICP and ICP/MS  systems may
      not exceed the CRDL.

      Results for the analyses of Solution AB during Che analytical runs mist
      be within che control limit of ±20% of the true value for Che analytes
      included in che Interference Check Samples.  If not, terminate the
      analysis, correct che problem, recalibrate the instrument, and
      reanalyze the analytical samples analyzed since the last compliant: ICS.

      If the ICP Interference Check Sample is not provided, independent ICS
      must be prepared with interferent and analyte concentrations at the
      levels specified in Table V- Initial and Continuing Calibration
      Verification and CRDL Standard Control Limits For Inorganic Analyses
      (see Exhibit C) .

      If the concentrations of the  interfering  analytes  in Solution A or  AB
      are above the linear range of the  instrument,  diluting Chose  solutions
      is permitted as long as the dilution does not cause  the true  value  of
      the interfering analytes to be less than  10%  of the  established linear
      range .
                                    E-8                                 10/91

-------
8.2   The values for che 1C? and ICP/MS interference check saaple must be
      recorded on Forn VI - LCIN for all analysis systems, as indicated in
      Exhibit B.

9.    MATRIX SPIKE SAMPLE ANALYSIS (S)

9.1   The matrix spike sample analysis is intended Co provide information
      about Che effect of Che sample matrix on Che preparation and
      measurement methodology.  The spike is added before Che sample
      preparation (i.e., prior Co digestion or distillation).  One spike
      sample analysis per mechod muse be performed on each group of samples
      for each Sample Delivery Group.

      If Che spike analysis is performed on the same sample Chat is chosen
      for che duplicate sample analysis, spike calculations must be performed
      using che results of che sample designated as Che "original sample"
      (see Section 10.  Duplicate Sample Analysis).   The average of Che
      duplicate results cannot be used for the purpose of determining percent
      recovery.  Samples identified as field blanks must not be used for
      spiked sample analysis.   SMO may require that a specific sample be used
      for Che spike sample analysis.   This requirement is indicated on che
      traffic reporc or other  documents that are shipped Co che Contractor
      with che samples,  and muse be followed.

      For Spike Sample  Analysis each analyte must be spiked with a
      concentration level in the Spiked Sample solution as indicated in Table
      IV in Exhibit C.

      If two analytical methods are used to obtain  the reported values for a
      given analyte within a Sample Delivery Group,  Chen spike samples must
      be run by each method used.

      If che spike recovery is not within che limits of 75-125%, Che data of
      all samples received associated with that spike sample and determined
      by che same analytical mechod must be flagged with the leCCer "N" on
      Form  I- LCIN and VII -  LCIN.  An exception to Chis rule muse be
      followed when che sample concentration exceeds Che spike concentration
      by a factor of four or more.  In such an event, che data must be
      reported unflagged even  if the percent recovery does not meet che 75-
      125% recovery criteria.

      In Che instance when there is more than one spike sample per mechod per
      SDG. if one spike sample recovery is not within the control limits, all
      samples of the same method in the SDG must be flagged.

      Individual component percent recoveries (%R) are calculated as  follows:

                         %Recovery  - (SSR-SRI x 100
                                         SA
      Where,   SSR  -  Spiked Sample Result
                SR  -  Sample Result
                SA  -  Spike Added
                                    E-9                                10/91

-------
      when sample concentration is less Chan the instrument detection limit.
      use SR - 0 only for purposes of calculating % Recovery.  The spike
      saaple results, sample results and t Recovery (positive,  negative or
      zero) must be reported on Form VII - LCIN for all analysis systems, as
      indicated.

9.2   The values for the sample,  spiked sample and the spike added shall be
      recorded on Fora VII - LCIN for all  analysis systems,  as  indicated in
      Exhibit B

10.   Pny|je^TE SAMPLE ANALYSIS (D>

10.1  One duplicate sample per method must be  analyzed for each Sample
      Delivery Group.  Duplicates cannot be  averaged for reporting on Form I
      - LCIN.

      Sample*  identified as field blanks must  not be used for duplicate
      sample analysis.   SMO may require that a specific sample  be used for
      duplicate sample  analysis.   This requirement is usually indicated on
      the traffic report and must be  followed.   If two analytical methods are
      used to  obtain the reported values for the same element for a Sample
      Delivery Group, duplicate samples  must be run by each method used.

      The relative percent differences  (RFD) for each analyte are calculated
      as follows:
                       RPD -  IS  - PI x 100
                              (S+D)/2

      Where,  RFD  -  Relative  Percent Difference
               S  -  First Sample Value (original)
               D  -  Second Sample Value  (duplicate)

      A control limit of 20% for  RPD must be used for original and duplicate
      sample  values greater than  or  equal to Sx IDL.   A control limit of (+)
      the IDL must be used if  either sample  or duplicate values is less than
      Sx IDL, and the absolute value of the  control limit (IDL) must be
      entered in the "Control  Limit" column  on Form VIII - LCIN.

      If one  result is above  the  Sx  IDL level and the other is below, use the
      + IDL criteria.  If both sample  values are less than the IDL, the RFD
      is not reported on FORM VIII  - LCIN.

      If the duplicate sample results  are outside the control limits, flag
      all the data for samples received associated with that duplicate sample
      with an "*" on Forms I - LCIN  and IX  - LCIN.  In the instance where
      there  is more  than one duplicate sample per SDG, if one duplicate
      result  is not within contract criteria, flag all samples  of  the st
      method in the  SDG.

10.2  The values  for the sample  and duplicate must be recorded  on  Fora VIII -
      LCIN for all analysis systems, as  indicated  in Exhibit B.


                                    E-10                                10/91

-------
11.    LABORATORY CONTROL SAMPLJ!  CLCS) ANALYSIS

11.1   The  Laboratory Control  Sample  (LCS) must be analyzed for  each analyte
       using  the  same sample preparation, analytical methods and QA/QC
       procedures employed for the  field  samples received.

       The  LCS vill be provided for a period of at least nine months after
       contract award.  The LCS oust be prepared and analyzed ualng each of
       the  procedures applied  to the analysis of field samples.   If the LCS is
       unavailable, other  quality assurance  check saatples or certified
       materials  traceable to  HIST  certified standards nay  be used.   The true
       value  for  each analyte  concentration  in the LCS must not  exceed the
       instrument's linear range and must not be added at a concentration
       lower  than the contract required detection limit (CBOL) for  that
      analyte.  One LCS must be prepared and analyzed for  each  group of
      samples in a Sample Delivery Group, or for each batch of  samples
      prepared by the same method, whichever is more  frequent.

      If the results of the LCS are outside the control limits established by
      SMO,  the analysis must be terminated,  the problem corrected,  and the
      samples associated with that LCS reprepared  and reanalyzed.  A control
      limit of ±20% of the true value must be  used if no control Halts are
      provided with the LCS solution.

11.2  The values  for the LCS must be  recorded  on Fora IX -  LCIH for all
      analysis systems,  as indicated  in. Exhibit B,  Section II.
12.    pg»*OMIAHCE gVALPATIOlf "fftMfUP (PES)

12.1  The Performance Evaluation Sample will assist SMO in monitoring
      contractor performance.  The PES may be designated as a single blind QC
      material or as full volume samples along with other environmental
      samples as a double blind.  The laboratory will not be informed of the
      analytes in the PES or their concentration and the PES will be analyzed
      concurrently with all samples in the Sample Delivery Group.

      The Contractor must dilute the PES to volume according to the
      instructions that accompany the ampules to the laboratory.

      The laboratory must prepare the samples for analysis using the sample
      preparation procedures outlined in Exhibit D, Section III, Sample
      Preparation.  The PES will be analyzed as a TOTAL CONSTITUENT AHALYSIS.
      Analysis of the PES will be in accordance with Exhibit D, Section  IV,
      Sample Analysis.  All contract QC muse also be met.

      In addition to PES dilution, preparation and analysis, the Contractor
      will be responsible for correctly  identifying and quantifying the
      analytes included in the PES.  SMO will notify  the  Contractor of
      unacceptable performance.  MOTE: Unacceptable performance for
      identification and quantification  of  analytes in the PES is  defined as
      a score of less than 75 percent.
                                   E-ll                                 10/91

-------
 12.2  The analysis  results for the FES oust be recorded on Form  I  •  LCIN for
       all analytes.   Exhibit B, Section II explains the instructions for
       completing  the  forms.

 13.    SERIAL DILUTION ANALYSIS (L)

 13.1   In  order to check for the presence of matrix interference, the
       Contractor must analyze and report the results of the Serial Dilution
       analysis.  Except for HYICP, ICP/MS. and Furnace AA methods,  one Serial
       Dilution analysis per method must be performed for each Sample Delivery
       Group.  Identified field blanks mav not b.7 mtd for Serial Dilution
       analvaia.

      The Serial Dilution analysis is performed by diluting a prepared sample
      aliquot five-fold (Sx or 1+4).   The dilution must be performed on an
      analyte by analyte bases.  The serial dilution is the dilution of the
      sample, or an aliquot of the sample,  that contains a concentration
       level of the analyte within the linear range.

      If the analyte concentration in the field sample is  sufficiently high
       (minimally a factor of SO above the IDL),  the  Serial Dilution must
      agree within 10% of the initial sample concentration determination
      after correction for the five  fold dilution.   If the Serial Dilution
      analysis for one or more analyte is not within 10%,  a chemical or
      physical interference effect must be suspected and the data for all
      analytes exceeding the limit in the samples associated with that serial
      dilution must be flagged with  an "E" on Form X - LCIN and Form I -
      LCIN.

13.2  The values for the Initial sample and serial dilution must be recorded
      on Form X -  LCIN for all analysis systems,  as  indicated in Exhibit B.
14.1  In order to check for the presence of physical interferences and
      correct for them, the contractor must use, measure, and report the
      results of the internal standards for each ICP/MS analysis performed.

      A minimum of three internal standards, listed in Table X Exhibit C,
      bracketing the mass range must be used.  The intensity level of an
      internal standard for each sample, duplicate, spike analysis and PES
      must be greater than 30% and less than 125% of the intensity level of
      the internal standard of the blank calibration standard solution (SO) .
      If not, the sample mist be reanalyzed after performing a five fold
      (1+4) dilution.  If the percent relative  intensity, %R, (see Exhibit  B,
      Part Q) remains less than 30% or  greater  than 125%, a physical
      interference must be suspected, and  the data on Form XV must be flagged
      with an "E".  The analytes affected  by the  interference must be flagged
      with an "E" on Form I  - LCIN.  The analytes affected by the
      interference must be listed  in the comment  section on  the appropriate
      Forms VII - LCIN and VIII  -  LCIN  if  the affected  sample is a matrix
      spike or duplicate.
                                   E-12                                10/91

-------
       The intensity levels  of the  intern>- standards  for the CCV and  CCB
       solutions must agree  within ±20%  of the  intensity level of the  internal
       standard of the initial calibration blank standard solution  (SO) .   If
       not, the analysis must  be  terminated,  the problem corrected  and the
       CCV/CCB reanalyzed only once.   If the     '  reanalysis of a  CCV/CCB
       yields a %R value within control  limits,  Chen the analysis must be
       stopped, the problem  corrected, and the  preceding 10 analytical samples
       or  all analytical samples  analyzed  since  the  last compliant  calibration
       verification may be reanalyzed for  the analytes affected.  Otherwise,
       the instrument must be  recalibrated, the calibration verified and the
       affected analytical samples rerun in the context of  a new run.

       The intensity levels  of  the internal standards for the ICV and  ICB
       solutions must agree within ±20% of the intensity level of the  internal
       standard of the blank calibration standard solution  (SO).   If not, the
      analysis must be terminated,  the problem corrected, and a new
      analytical run must be started.

14.2  The values for the  Internal Standard Percent  Relative Intensity (%R)
      must be reported for each ICP/MS analysis on  Form XV • LCIN as
      indicated in Exhibit B.
15.
15.1  Before any field  samples are analyzed under this contract,  the
      instrument detection limits (in ug/L) must have been determined for
      each instrument used,  no earlier than 30 calender days before the start
      of contract analyses and at least quarterly (every  3 calendar months
      thereafter) ,  and  must meet the levels specified in  Table I  in Exhibit
      C.

      If a Contractor fails to adhere to the requirements listed  in this
      section,  a Contractor may expect, but SHO is not limited to the
      following actions:   reduction of numbers of samples sent under  this
      contract,  suspension of sample shipment to the Contractor,  ICP/MS tape
      audit,  data package audit, an on-site laboratory evaluation, remedial
      performance evaluation sample, and/or contract sanctions.

      The Instrument Detection Limits (in ug/L) must be determined by
      multiplying by three the average of the standard deviations obtained  on
      three nonconsecutive days (each analyte in reagent  water) at a
      concentration 3 times  or 5 times the IDL, with seven consecutive
      measurements.  Each measurement oust be performed as though it  were a.
      separate  analytical sample (i.e., each measurement  must be  followed by
      a rinse and/or any  other procedure normally performed between the
      analysis  of separate samples) .  IDLs must be determined and reported
      for each  set of instrument parameters used in the analysis  of samples,
      including wavelengths in  ICP, and elemental expressions in  ICP/MS.

      The quarterly determined IDL  for an  instrument must be used as  the IDL
      for that  instrument during  that quarter.   If the  instrument is  adjusted
      in any way that may affect  the  IDL,  the IDL for  that instrument must be
      redete rained and  the results  submitted  for use as  the established IDL
      for that  instrument for the remainder of  the quarter.


                                   E-13                                 10/91

-------
      IDLs must be  reported for each instrument used on Form XII - LCIN and
      submitted with each data package.  If multiple instruments are used for
      the analysis  of an analyte within a Sample Delivery Group, the highest
      IDL for the analyte must be used for reporting concentration values for
      that Sample Delivery Group.

      The Instrument Detection Limit for each analyte must be less than or
      equal to the Contract Required Detection limit.  An exception is
      granted if the analyte concentration in the samples analyzed by an
      instrument is greater than or equal to five times the reported
      detection limit for that instrument.

IS.2  Instrument Detection Limits must be determined quarterly. The results
      of that determination must be reported on Form XII - LCIN, and
      submitted with each data package,  for each and every instrument used to
      produce data in the SDG. as indicated in Exhibit B.
16.   Tim'iRfiTJT'FT ^BBETTTi01*5 TOR Icp *^P ICT/MS

16.1  The ICF and ICP/MS interelement correction factors must have been
      determined within three months prior to beginning sample analyses under
      this contract,  and at least annually thereafter.   Correction factors
      for spectral and isobaric interferences must be determined at all
      wavelengths and elemental expressions used for each analyte reported by
      ICP and ICP/MS.

      The correction factors must be determined under the same instrument
      conditions used for sample analysis.  If the instrument was adjusted in
      any way that may affect the interelement correction factors, the
      factors must be redetermined and the results submitted for use.

16.2  Interelement correction factors must be determined annually.  The
      results of that determination must be reported on Form XIII - LCIN, and
      submitted with each data package, for all ICP and ICP/MS parameters,
      for each and every instrument used to generate data in the SDG, as
      indicated in Exhibit B.
17.
      Because of the nature of the HYICP and Furnace AA techniques, the
      procedures summarized in Figure 1 are required for quantitation.
      (These procedures do not replace those in Exhibit D, but supplement  the
      guidance provided therein).

      a.  All results of HYICP and Furnace AA analyses must be within the
          linear and calibration range respectively.  In addition, all results
          of analyses, except during full Methods of Standard Additions  (MSA),
          require duplicate exposures (injections for Furnace AA).  Average
          concentration values must be used on the Reporting Forms.  A maximum
          of 10 full sample analyses to a maximum 20 exposures or injections
          nay be performed between each consecutive calibration verification
          and blank.  The raw data package must contain intensity (absorbance
          for Furnace AA) and concentration value for both exposures
          (injections for Furnace AA). the average value and the  relative


                                    E-14                                 10/91

-------
          standard deviation (RSD) or coefficient of  variation (CV)  for each
          analysis.   For concentrations greater than  IDL,  the  duplicate
          exposure (injections  for Furnace  AA)  readings  must agree within 15%
          RSD  or  CV,  »."-  the analytical sample must be  rerun once  (i.e.,  two
          additional  exposures  or injections).   If the readings are  still out
          of the  15%  limit, flag the  value  reported of Form I  - LCIH with an
          •M".  The "M"  flag is required for the analytical spike as well as
          the  sample.  If the analytical spike  for *  sample requires an "M"
          flag, the flag must be reported on Form 1 -  LCIM for that  sample.

      b.   All  HYICP and  Furnace AA analyses for each  analytical sample,
          including those requiring an "H"  flag,  will  require  at least  an
          analytical  spike to determine if  the  MSA will  be required  for
          quantitation.   The analytical spike2  will be required to be at a
          concentration  (in the sample) of  30%  of the  linear range of each
          analyte.  This  requirement  for an analytical spike will include the
          LCS  and  the preparation blank.  The LCS must be  quantified from the
          calibration curve and corrective  action(i.e. redigestion), if
          needed,  taken  accordingly.   MSA is not  to be performed on  the  LCS or
          preparation blank,  regardless of  spike  recovery  results.)  If  the
          preparation blank analytical spike recovery  is out of control  (85-
          115%) , the spiking solution must  be verified by  respiking and
          rerunning the preparation blank once.   If the preparation blank
          analytical spike recovery is still out  of control  limits,  the
          problem must be corrected and respiking and  reanalysis of all
          analytical samples associated with that blank must be performed.   An
          analytical spike is not required  on the pre-digestion spike sample.

          The  analytical  spike  of a sample  must be run immediately after that
          sample.  The percent  recovery (%R) of the spike,  calculated by the
          same formula as Spike Sample Analyses (see Section 9), determines
          how  the  sample  will be  quantified, as follows:

          1)   If the spike  recovery  is less than 40%, the sample must be
              diluted by a factor of 5 and rerun with another spike.  This
              step must  only be  performed  once.   If,   after the dilution,  the
              spike recovery is  still <40%, report data from  the initial
              undiluted  analysis and flag  with an "E" to  indicate
              interference problems.

          2)   If  the spike and the spike recovery is  at or between  85%  and
              115%.  the  sample must  be quantified directly from the
              calibration curve and  reported down to  the  IDL.
2
 Analytical spikes are post-digestion  spikes to be prepared prior  to  analysis
by adding a known quantity of the analyte to an aliquot of  the prepared
sample.  The unspiked sample aliquot must be compensated  for any volume
change in the spike samples by addition of ASTM Type II water to the  unspiked
sample aliquot.  The volume of the spiking solution added must not exceed 10%
of the analytical sample volume.-  This requirement also applies to MSA
spikes.
                                   E-15                                10/91

-------
                                                            . X
     3)   If  the  spike  recovery  is greater than 40%  and less than 85%,  or
          greater than  115%,  Che sample must be quantified by  MSA.

c.   The following procedures muse be  incorporated into MSA analyses.

     1)   Data  from MSA calculations must be within  the linear range as
          determined by the calibration curve generated at the beginning
          of  the  analytical run.

     2)   The sample and  three spikes must be analyzed  consecutively for
          MSA quantitation (the  "initial* spike run  data are specifically
          excluded from use in the MSA quantitation).   Only single
          exposures (injections for Furnace AA) are  required for  MSA
          quantitation.

          Each  full MSA counts as two analytical samples toward
          determining 10% QC  frequency (i.e.,. five full MSA* can  be
          performed between calibration verifications).

     3)    For analytical runs containing only MSAs,  single  exposures
          (injections for Furnace AA)  can be used for QC samples  during
          that  run.  For instruments that operate in an MSA mode  only,
          MSA can be used to determine QC samples during that run.   This
          option  must be used consistently.

     4)    Spikes  must be prepared such that:
          a)  Spike 1  is approximately  50% of the  sample concentration  in
             ug/L.
          b)  Spike 2  is approximately  100% of  the sample concentration
             in ug/L.
          c)  Spike 3  is approximately  150% of  the sample concentration
             in ug/L.

     5)    The data for  each MSA analysis must be clearly identified  in
          the raw data  documentation (using added concentration as the  x-
          variable  and  intensity or found concentration as the  y»
          variable) along with the slope, x:intercept,  y-intercept and
          correlation coefficient (r) for the least  squares fit of  the
          data, the results must be reported on Form XI -  LCIN.  Reported
          values  obtained by  MSA must be flagged on  the data sheet (Form
          I - LCIN) with  the  letter "S" if the  correlation coefficient is
          greater than  or equal  to 0.995.

     6)   If  the  correlation  coefficient  (r) for  an  MSA analysis  is  less
          than  0.995,  the MSA analysis must be  repeated once.   If the
          correlation coefficient is still less than 0.995, report the
          results on  Form I  - LCIN  from  the  run with the greater
          correlation coefficient "r"  and flag the result with a "+".   On
          Form  XI - LCIN  report the results  of both MSA analysis and flag
          with  a "+"  for  any MSA result that yields a  correlation
          coefficient less than 0.995.
                               E-16                                 10/91

-------
                                Figure 1
                  FURNACE ATOMIC ABSORPTION AND HYICP
                            ANALYSIS SCHEME
    PREPARE AND ANALYZE
    SAMPLE AND ONE SPIKE
    30% THE LINEAR RANGE
   (Double Exposures (injections)
          Required)
     ANALYSES WITHIN
    CALIBRATION RANGE
               YES
    RECOVERY OF SPIKE
      LESSTHAN40%
              NO
     SPIKE RECOVERY
     LESS THAN 85% OR
    GREATER THAN 115%
              YES
QUANTITATE BY MSA WITH 3
  SPIKES AT 50.100. & 150%
OF SAMPLE CONCENTRATTON
    (Only Single Exposures
    (injections) Required)
           1
CORRELATION COEFFICIENT
     LESS THAN 0.995
NO
   FLAG DATA WITH "S"
                                     NO
                                       DILUTE SAMPLE
                                         AND SPIKE
                             If YES, Repeat Only ONCE
                                  If Still YES
                                    NO
                            If YES, Repeat Only ONCE
                                 If Still YES
                                                      FLAG DATA
                                                      WITH AN "E"
                                     QUANITTATE FROM
                                    CALIBRATION CURVE
                                     AND REPORT DOWN
                                          TOIDL
                                                     FLAG DATA
                                                      WITH A V
                              E-17
                                                                 10/91

-------